Documente Academic
Documente Profesional
Documente Cultură
USERS MANUAL
April 2004
Table of Contents
Chapter 1 - Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
Confidential
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
2.8
2.9
ii
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
iii
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
iv
5.1
5.2
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
Table of Contents
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
6.2
6.3
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
6.3.2
6.3.3
vi
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
7.5.5
7.5.6
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
9.2
9.3
9.4
Confidential
vii
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
9.4.2
9.4.3
9.4.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
9.8
9.9
viii
A.1
A.2
A.3
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
A.3.2.6
A.3.2.7
A.3.2.8
A.3.2.9
A.4
A.5
A.6
A.7
A.8
A.9
Confidential
ix
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.9
B.2
C.2
Appendix D - Modeling
D.1
D.2
D.3
D.4
D.5
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
D.6
D.7
D.8
D.9
F.2
F.3
F.4
F.5
F.6
Confidential
xi
Table of Contents
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
F.7
F.8
F.9
G.2
G.3
G.4
G.5
G.6
G.7
G.8
G.9
xii
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table of Contents
Confidential
xiii
xiv
Confidential
List of Figures
Figure 1-1.
Figure 1-2.
Figure 1-3.
Figure 1-4.
Figure 1-5.
Figure 1-6.
Figure 1-7.
Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu ........................1-12
Figure 1-8.
Figure 1-9.
Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-3.
Confidential
xv
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 2-4.
Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-7.
Figure 2-8.
Figure 2-9.
Figure 3-2.
Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-4.
Figure 3-5.
Figure 3-6.
Figure 3-7.
xvi
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 3-8.
Figure 3-9.
Confidential
xvii
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 4-2.
Figure 4-3.
Figure 4-4.
Figure 4-5.
Figure 4-6.
Figure 4-7.
Figure 4-8.
Figure 4-9.
xviii
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option ........4-36
Figure 4-23. Analysis Options Property Sheet: CAPO Tab .....................................................4-39
Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement ......................4-43
Figure 4-25. Analysis Options Property Sheet: TOPO Tab .....................................................4-45
Figure 4-26. Diagram and Progress Views After TOPO Analysis ............................................4-47
Figure 5-1.
Figure 5-2.
Figure 5-3.
Figure 5-4.
Figure 5-5.
Figure 5-6.
Figure 6-1.
Figure 6-2.
Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-5.
Figure 6-6.
Figure 6-7.
Figure 6-8.
Figure 6-9.
Confidential
xix
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-3.
Figure 7-4.
Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-6.
Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-8.
Figure 7-9.
Figure 8-2.
Figure 8-3.
xx
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Figure 8-4.
Figure 8-5.
Figure 8-6.
Figure 8-7.
Figure 8-8.
Figure 8-9.
Figure 9-2.
Figure 9-3.
Figure 9-4.
Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-6.
Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary .....9-12
Figure 9-7.
Figure 9-8.
Figure 9-9.
Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters ..............9-15
Figure A-2.
Figure A-3.
Figure A-4.
Figure A-5.
Figure B-1.
Figure B-2.
Figure D-1.
Confidential
xxi
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure D-2.
Figure D-3.
Figure D-4.
Figure D-5.
Figure D-6.
Figure D-7.
Figure D-8.
Figure D-9.
xxii
Confidential
List of Tables
Table 2-1.
Table 2-2.
Table 3-1.
Table 3-2.
Table 3-3.
Table 7-1.
Transformer Categories
Minimum Nameplate kVA .....................................................................................7-14
Table 7-2.
Table 7-3.
Table 7-4.
Table 7-5.
Fuse Table............................................................................................................7-32
Table 7-6.
Table 7-7.
Table 7-8.
Table 7-9.
Table 7-10.
Relay Curve..........................................................................................................7-37
Table 7-11.
RecloserMfrSpecs ................................................................................................7-38
Table 7-12.
Table 7-13.
Table 9-1.
Table 9-2.
Table 9-3.
Table A-1.
Table A-2.
Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT .......... A-6
Table A-3.
Table A-4.
Table A-5.
............................................................................................................................. A-20
Table A-6.
............................................................................................................................. A-21
Table A-7.
............................................................................................................................. A-22
Table A-8.
............................................................................................................................. A-24
Table A-9.
............................................................................................................................. A-25
Table B-2.
Table B-3.
Confidential
xxiii
List of Figures
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-4.
Table B-5.
Table B-6.
Table B-7.
Table B-8.
Table B-9.
Table F-1.
Table F-2.
Table F-3.
Table F-4.
Table F-5.
Table F-6.
Table F-7.
Table F-8.
Table F-9.
Table F-10.
Table F-11.
Table F-12.
Table F-13.
Table F-14.
Table F-15.
Table F-16.
Table F-17.
Table F-18.
Table F-19.
Table F-20.
Table F-21.
xxiv
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
List of Figures
Table F-22.
Table F-23.
Table F-24.
Table F-25.
Table F-26.
Table F-27.
Table F-28.
Table F-29.
Table F-30.
Table F-31.
Table F-32.
Table F-33.
Table G-1.
Table G-2.
Table G-3.
Table G-4.
Table G-5.
Capacitor Properties..............................................................................................G-5
Table G-6.
Device Groups.......................................................................................................G-6
Table G-7.
Table G-8.
Table G-9.
Confidential
xxv
xxvi
Confidential
Chapter 1
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
1.1 About the PSS/ADEPT Application
The Power System Simulator/Advanced Distribution Engineering Productivity Tool (PSS/ADEPT)
software was developed for engineers and technical personnel who design and/or analyze electrical distribution systems. PSS/ADEPT enables you to graphically create, edit, and analyze power
system models and diagrams.
PSS/ADEPT is available in stand-alone and network configurations for Microsoft Windows 2000
and Windows XP. Compatibility with PSS/U (Power System Simulator for Utilization) is provided
through raw data files and an associated Construction Dictionary. PSS/ADEPT is the next generation of the PSS/U product line.
Obtain output reports that display the results of a previously solved engineering
analysis.
Define and update single and multiple system component data via property sheets.
Tie Open Point Optimization: Finds the minimum loss configuration for a three-phase
radial system. For more information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.8.
Line Properties Calculator: Calculates transmission line constants. For more information, refer to Chapter 6.
Confidential
1-1
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Getting Help
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA): Performs reliability analysis. For more information, refer to Chapter 9.
Printed manual or CD
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Getting Help
For telephone support between the hours of 8:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m. Eastern Time
Monday through Friday, call (518) 395-5075.
Confidential
1-3
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Getting Help
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Installing and Using PSS/ADEPT
Confidential
1-5
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Views containing application processing information, graphical and tree representations of your network.
A Status Bar that displays program status information while PSS/ADEPT is running.
1.4.1 Views
The PSS/ADEPT application window contains four views (Figure 1-2):
Diagram View
Progress View
1-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
The Diagram View is the main view in the PSS/ADEPT application window. It displays whenever
you are using PSS/ADEPT (for example, whenever you open an existing diagram or create a new
one). The Report Preview displays only when you have requested a report. You can toggle on and
off (show or hide) the display of the Equipment List and Progress Views.
To set the display of the Equipment List and/or Progress Views:
1. Choose View from the Main Menu. The drop-down View Menu displays (Figure 1-3).
Confidential
1-7
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
Z order:
Send to Front: Renders selected diagram component on "top" of all other components within its layer.
Send to Back: Renders selected diagram component on the "bottom" of all other
components within its layer.
Shunt devices may contain capacitors, machines, static loads, MWh loads, harmonics
injections, harmonic filters, and standard faults.
Defaults contain the default properties for node, branch and shunt devices. Default
properties are used when a new device is placed on the diagram.
Confidential
1-9
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Click the + symbol in front of Sources to display a list of individual sources. Click the
symbol in front of Sources to collapse the tree.
If an individual network item symbol is "grayed" in the tree hierarchy, the item is not in service.
If there is no symbol in front of the item, it is not drawn on the diagram. This situation commonly arises when there are nodes in a PSS/U raw data file with x- and y-coordinates at (0,0).
The item will display in the Equipment List View as [ ], indicating an undrawn device. This item can
be drawn by right-clicking on the item and selecting Draw Item(s) from the pop-up menu.
1-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
The Equipment List pop-up menu provides access to additional features, depending on your current
level and position in the Equipment List View. For example:
1. Right-click on Network to position at the network level and display the Equipment List
Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-6). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View,
and access the Network Property sheet. ("Grayed" menu options are not available at
the Network level.)
Figure 1-6. Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
Confidential
1-11
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Right-click on Static Loads to position at the type level and display the Equipment List
Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-7). Here you can dock or hide the Equipment List View,
sort the individual static load items, and toggle the display of the item node
connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names.
("Grayed" menu options are not available at this level.) For example:
Figure 1-7. Expanded Item Type Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
1-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
3. Expand the static load type level and right-click on first individual network item to display the Equipment List Views pop-up menu (Figure 1-8). Here you can dock or hide
the Equipment List View, sort the individual items, toggle the display of the item node
connections: FROM/TO for branches and node location for shunts, or device names,
delete the item, zoom to the item on the diagram, and adjust the properties for the item.
For example:
Figure 1-8. Individual Item Level, Equipment List View Pop-Up Menu
Docking, hiding, sorting, adjusting the PSS/ADEPT display, etc., are all described further in Chapter
2, Section 2.1.
A check mark in front of an option in the Equipment List View pop-up menu indicates that the option
is active.
Although the Cut, Copy, and Paste operations affect both the Equipment List View and the
Diagram View, these operations may only be performed from the Diagram View. Hence, these
operations are not available in the Equipment List View pop-up menu.
The Results tab is used to set what results, if any, should be displayed on the diagram. For more
information, refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3.
Confidential
1-13
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
Previous Page
Next Page
Last Page
Print
Zoom Level
Export
Confidential
1-15
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
File Toolbar
Harmonics Toolbar
Analysis Toolbar
Diagram Toolbar
Results Toolbar
Zoom Toolbar
Reports Toolbar
Confidential
1-17
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
functions for defining device groups, load categories, and load snapshots. Load scaling, machine
scaling, economic parameters, and network tracing preferences are also defined here.
Analysis Menu
The Analysis Menu options allow you to perform analysis functions and set solution options.
Report Menu
The Report Menu options allow you to select from several available reports. Some reports cannot
be selected unless a solution was previously performed. For more information about the Report
Menu, refer to Chapter 5, Section 5.1.
Tools Menu
The Tools Menu allows you to access the Line Constants module.
Window Menu
The Window Menu options allow you to control the placement of windows in the application. New
instances of diagram windows may be created and multiple windows may be cascaded or tiled.
Windows that have been previously iconized (minimized) may be arranged by choosing Arrange
Icons.
Help Menu
The Help Menu options provide access to the online help and general information about the application, including the names and versions of static and dynamic link libraries (LIBS, and DLLs) used
by the application.
1.4.4 Toolbars
The PSS/ADEPT application has seven toolbars:
File
Diagram
Analysis
Zoom
Results
Reports
Each toolbar contains buttons that provide quick access to PSS/ADEPT functions. As you move the
pointer over a button on the toolbar, a "tooltip" text box will appear that describes the function of the
button (Figure 1-14). The Status Bar also displays explanatory text about the toolbar button.
PSS/ADEPTs default setting displays all of the toolbars.
1-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
Tooltip
Confidential
1-19
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
To create a toolbar:
1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays.
2. Click the Toolbars tab.
3. Click the New button. The New Toolbar box displays.
4. Type the name of your toolbar in the Toolbar name field, and click the OK button. Your
toolbar displays in the Toolbar tab.
5. Click the Commands tab.
6. In the Categories column, click on a toolbar category. The buttons associated with the
toolbar display in the Buttons column.
7. Left-click on a button in the Button column and hold down the mouse button.
8. Drag the button out of the column to the new toolbar and release the mouse. The
system adds the button to your new toolbar.
9. Repeat Step 8 to add icons to your toolbar.
10. Click the OK button to save the new toolbar.
To hide a toolbar, do one of the following:
Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays. Click
the Toolbars tab. Click in the box that precedes the name of the toolbar you want to
hide until the box is empty. An unchecked box indicates that the toolbar will not show
in the application window.
Right-click anywhere in the toolbar area. A pop-up menu appears, select each toolbar
to show or hide. No checkmark before the name of the toolbar indicates that the toolbar
will not show in the application window.
Confidential
1-21
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To reset any of the PTI toolbars (File, Diagram, Analysis, Zoom) to their original buttons:
1. Choose Tools>Customize from the Main Menu. The Customize dialog displays.
2. Click the Toolbars tab.
3. Make sure theres a check mark in the box preceding the toolbar you want to reset.
4. Click the Reset button.
5. Click the OK button.
To delete a button from a toolbar:
1. On the toolbar, click the button you want to delete and hold down the mouse button.
2. Drag the button off the toolbar area.
To save your toolbar configuration:
1. Choose File>Workspace>Save. The Save Workspace dialog displays (Figure 1-16).
New (Insert)
1-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
File Toolbar
The File Toolbar (Figure 1-17) provides basic file operations such as creating, opening, and saving
both PSS/U raw data (*.dat) and native PSS/ADEPT binary files (*.adp). Basic MS Windows editing
functionality such as cut, copy, paste, delete, and printing are also located on the File Toolbar. The
About button provides information on the PSS/ADEPT version you are using.
New
Open
Save
Cut
Copy
Paste
Print Preview
Delete Undo
About
Use the Select button to select (not place) an item in the Diagram View. When you click
the Select button on the Diagram Toolbar, any symbol previously selected on the
toolbar will no longer be active.
Use a Symbol button to add a specific device a node, branch, or shunt to your network diagram. When you click any symbol button, any previously selected symbol or
selected item will no longer be active.
The Text Annotation button allows you to place text anywhere in the diagram. Click the
Text Annotation button, move the pointer to the place on the diagram where you want
to add your own comments, and click. The word "Annotation" displays on the screen.
Double-click on the word "Annotation" to display the Annotation box and enter your own
text. Click the OK button to save your comments and display them in the diagram.
Show/Hide
Select
Show Grid
Grid Snap
Show
Results Line Switch
Horizontal
Node
Rotate
Rotate -90
Rotate +90
Transformer
Vertical
Node
Point
Node
Source
Load
Protection
Text
Equipment Annotations
Synchronous
Machine
Capacitor
MWh Load
Harmonic
Injection
Harmonic
Filter
Standard
Fault
Knee
Point
Confidential
1-23
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If you are using US or ISO transformer symbols on your diagram, make sure the PSS/ADEPT
program settings are set to display the symbols correctly.
To check the program settings and, if necessary, adjust the symbol display:
1. Choose File>Program Settings from the Main Menu. The Program Settings dialog
displays (Figure 1-19).
1-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
Analysis Toolbar
The Analysis Toolbar (Figure 1-20) provides access to functions on the network. Each analysis type
has its own set of analysis and result display options.
Flat Transformers: Command sets all transformer taps to 1.0 pu. If the transformer tap
range does not include 1.0, then the tap is set as close to 1.0 pu as possible.
Fault Calculation: Perform short circuit calculations on each node where a fault has
been specified.
Fault All: Perform short circuit calculations on all nodes using selected fault types.
Toggle Fault Status: Toggle (in or out) the standard fault device status.
Motor Starting Calculation: Perform motor starting calculation using selected motors
to start.
Load Snapshots: Define "pictures" of load data that may be optionally chosen to use
in an analysis activity. See Chapter 3, Section 3.11.
Network Validation: When selected, checks the network for unusual circumstances.
See Chapter 4, Section 4.2.2.
Motor
Start
Flat Transformers
CAPO
TOPO
Load
Snapshots
Analysis
Options
Flat Capacitors
Fault
Calculation
Load Flow
Fault
All
Toggle
Fault
Status
Clear
Faults
DRA
Coordination
Harmonics
Network
Validation
Confidential
1-25
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
The PSS/ADEPT Application Window
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Zoom Toolbar
The Zoom Toolbar (Figure 1-21) consists of control buttons that allow you to set zoom areas of your
network diagram and set other diagram properties such as color selection and font selection.
Zoom
Previous
Pan
Zoom
100%
Zoom
Extent
Zoom
Area
Zoom
In
Zoom
Out
Diagram
Properties
Show
Phase A
Show
Phase C
Show
Phase B
Show Min
(A, B, C)
1-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
Reports Toolbar
The Reports Toolbar (Figure 1-23) allows you to view a report following an analysis.
Branch Current
by Phase
Power Flow
Summary Input
List
Power Flow
Details
Voltage
Profile
Node Voltage
Branch
by Phase
Power Losses
Input file directory path. The path where input data files are located. Select Disable to
follow Standard Windows behavior. That is, use the path where the last file was
accessed.
Report file directory path. The path where the report files (*.rpt) are located. The default
is \Program Files\PTI\PSS-ADEPT\Rpt.
Image file directory path. The path where the image files (*.bmp, *.jpg, etc.) are located.
When the Construction Dictionary path is changed from the Program Settings dialog, a
message box appears indicating that PSS/ADEPT is about to automatically update
Confidential
1-27
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
branch item (Line, Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor) properties that are
dependent on the active Construction Dictionary. After pressing the OK button,
changes to the Program Settings dialog will be committed and all branch items in the
currently open document (if there is one) will be updated, along with the default Line,
Switch, Transformer and Series Capacitor, which are document-independent. If a particular branch item's Construction Type is not found in the newly-selected Construction
Dictionary, it will be considered user-defined; its Construction Dictionary-dependent
properties will remain unchanged and will be modifiable from the item Properties
dialog. If the construction dictionary path is blank, the Construction Type of every
branch item, including the default items, will be considered user-defined.
PSS/ADEPT uses the same Construction dictionary as PSS/U. The construction
dictionary is read when the PSS/U raw data file is opened in PSS/ADEPT. If a
directory path is not specified PSS/ADEPT defaults to the input file directory path.
Refer to Appendix C for construction dictionary file format.
1-28
Transformer symbol type (ISO or US) you want to use in your network diagrams.
Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files (the scale factor by which you
want to scale x,y coordinates when generating the diagram from a PSS/U raw data file).
Force node names to uppercase. Select this option to force all nodes from PSS/U to
uppercase.
Allow duplicate node names. Used when merging files together. Selecting this option
will allow duplicate nodes in both the original file and the file being merged with.
Tooltip Preferences.
Load display preferences rectangular (P + jQ) or polar (S, pf, leading/lagging) you want
for your Static Load Property sheet.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
The Program Settings dialog shown in Figure 1-24 illustrates the drive location of the Construction
Dictionary file.
Confidential
1-29
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Coordinate scale factor for reading/writing raw data files: Enter the number by
which you want to scale x,y coordinates when generating a diagram from a PSS/U raw
data file.
Force node names to uppercase: Will cause all node names in the raw data file to be
converted to uppercase.
Allow duplicate node names: Used by a file merge, selecting this option will allow
duplicate nodes to be present in both the original input file and the file being merged
with.
Transformer Symbol Type: Select the Transformer Symbol Type: ISO or US.
Undo Levels: Select the maximum number of undo operations that will be stored by
the program.
Show hidden items: If you want to display hidden (invisible) items in the diagram, click
the Show Hidden Items check box. By default, hidden (invisible) items are not displayed in the diagram.
Position branch results labels close to ends: When checked, results will be displayed at the absolute ends of the branch independent of branch length. When unchecked, results will be placed based on a fraction of the branch length.
Separate node name and result labels: When checked, you can set unique font
attributes for the node names and results text. When unchecked, node names and
results will be displayed with the same font attributes. This option is more efficient in
terms of performance especially with large network diagrams.
Load Property sheet display: Click Rectangular to display load data as P(kW) and
Q(kvar); or click Polar to display load data as S(kVA), pf leading/lagging.
Restore last workspace at start-up: If you want to open automatically the last saved
workspace on program start-up, click the Restore Last Workspace at Start-up box.
Tool Tips: When checked a tooltip style popup window will be displayed when the
mouse cursor is positioned over an item on the diagram. You can set the information
displayed by selecting Settings... The Tooltip Settings dialog displays (Figure 1-25).
1-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting PSS/ADEPT Program Properties
Confidential
1-31
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Diagram View Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Diagram View Properties
2. Click the General tab and set the layout characteristics for the Diagram View:
These options may be modified at any time while the Diagram View is available
by selecting the Apply button without closing the dialog.
Grid (spacing and snap distance): Enter the spacing between grid lines (inches)
when the grid is displayed. Enter how far away from the grid line you want before an
item is snapped to it.
Colors (Symbol, Text, Background, Grid, Invalid, Flow arrow): Click each Browse
button and select the colors for the diagrams symbol, text (foreground), background, grid, invalid results and flow arrows.
Item Labels: Click the box that precedes any label name/marker (a check mark
appears) that you want to display on the diagram.
Fonts: Click the Font... button and select the font you want for the item labels. Click
the Apply to labels... button to select what labels to apply the selected font. You can
apply a selected font to item name labels, item property labels, result labels, and annotation labels.
3. Click the Color Coding tab and select one of the color settings:
You can assign colors to flag nodes that fall outside specified voltage thresholds, flag
overloaded branches, unbalanced nodes and branches, branches under a power factor limit, and/or flag devices that belong to a certain group.
Voltage thresholds, rating limits, power factor limits, and unbalance options are
set in the Analysis Options under the General tab; refer to Chapter 4, Section 4.1
for more information.
To color code items by group: Select Items by Group. A different color value is
assigned to each group. Colors for a specific group are specified in the
Networks>Group dialog. If an item belongs to one or more groups, there is no way to
ascertain which groups color is displayed.
To color code items by category: Select Loads and machines by category. A different color value is assigned to each category. Colors for a specific category are specified in the Network>Load Categories dialog. If an item belongs to one or more
category, there is no way to tell which groups color is displayed.
To color code items by nominal voltage level: Select Items by Nominal Voltage
Level. Items are color coded using defined voltage levels. To define voltage level colors, expand the Network>Voltage Levels from the Tree View and double-click on the
voltage level to change its color.
Voltage levels are stored in the system registry not in a .adp file. You can automatically
add missing voltage levels by right-clicking on the Voltage Levels folder and selecting
Populate Voltage Levels. Voltage levels can be added by right-clicking on the
Voltage Levels folder and selecting Add Voltage Level. Voltage levels can be deleted
by selecting the voltage level and pressing the delete [Del] key.
The nominal voltage of a branch or shunt item is determined by the nominal voltage (base kV) of the node(s) to which it is connected.
To color code items by result voltage level: Select Items by result voltage level.
Items are color coded based on resultant voltage levels. This option requires a previous
load flow solution. You can specify the color to use to highlight all network items that
Confidential
1-33
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Diagram View Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
are above the maximum voltage threshold (High), below the minimum voltage threshold (Low), and nodes that are in-between the maximum and minimum threshold values
(Mid). Voltage thresholds are defined by selecting Analysis>Options... from the main
menu.
To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalance nodes and
branches and select a color. Unbalance options are defined in Analysis>Options.
Voltage unbalance can be calculated as the percent difference between maximum and
minimum phase voltage, maximum and average phase voltage, or the ratio of negativesequence to positive-sequence voltage. Current unbalance can be calculated as the
percent difference between maximum and average phase current, percent difference
between phase and average phase current, the ratio of zero-sequence to positivesequence current, or the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current.
To color code overloaded branches: Select Overloaded Branches and select a
color. Branch rating limits are specified in Analysis>Options.
To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power
factor limit and select a color. Power factor limit is defined in Analysis>Options.
4. Click the Apply button to save the options you selected.
1-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Default Item Properties
Confidential
1-35
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Default Item Properties
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. The Default Properties sheet of the selected device displays (as shown in Figure 1-28).
1-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Setting Default Item Properties
Confidential
1-37
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) PSS/ADEPTs native binary file format that includes all the diagram options such as grid on/off, colors, results format, etc. This format does not
contain analysis results.
PSSU/Slider (*. slu) files previously created with the Slider/U application.
You can save your diagrams in PSS/ADEPT (*.adp) and PSS/U (*.dat) file formats only. (Refer to
Appendix A for limitations: partial diagram, no poly lines, etc.)
1-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
Confidential
1-39
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
Confidential
1-41
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Welcome to PSS/ADEPT 5
Opening and Saving Files in PSS/ADEPT
Confidential
1-43
1-44
Confidential
Chapter 2
Creating a Network Model
2.1 Overview: Creating a Network Model
After you have defined your working environment and the properties of the electrical network you
want to create (Chapter 1), you will be ready to create a graphical network model using
PSS/ADEPT. In this chapter, you will learn how to:
Set properties for your network model such as voltage levels, item ordering, and
economic data.
Adjust the display of the views in the PSS/ADEPT application window and your
diagram.
PSS/ADEPT enables you to place symbols that represent the network items in a diagram. The symbols are organized into three categories:
Individual Items
Nodes
Confidential
2-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Root node: Designate any node in the network as the root node. It is used to determine
the ordering of report records and during the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) analysis. the root node is used in conjunction with the specified item ordering method
(Chapter 2, Section 2.10).
System three-phase base kVA: Specify the system base kVA; it will be used by
PSS/ADEPT as a base to calculate the source impedance and for per unit and physical
value conversions.
System standard base voltage (kV): Specify the base voltage in kV; it will be used to
set the default node base voltage. When importing a raw data file, if no base voltage is
entered in the node data field for node kV, the value specified here will be used as the
node base voltage.
System Frequency (Hz): Specify the system base frequency in Hz; it is not currently
used in any calculations, however it can be used as a reference for specifying impedances.
Comments: Enter any text you need to identify the case. The first line will be used as
the report description.
3. Click the Reliability tab (Figure 2-2) to display additional prompts.
Confidential
2-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
mixed; the base on which these properties are entered must be fixed. If the base is
miles, then the base is miles for all reliability properties for which length is a factor.
4. Enter/select the reliability properties for your network model:
Substation name: Enter a name for the substation to which the data apply. It appears
only in the raw data file. This field may be blank.
Overhead failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Enter a value to define how often the
overhead line fails in a given time period (usually one year). The overhead failure rate
is valid for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG, and is given
in failures/unit length/unit time.
Overhead repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an overhead line
once it has failed. The time specified here is usually in hours but may be specified as
any unit of time as long as it is applied consistently to all data. This repair time is valid
for all construction types that do not begin with the characters, UG.
Underground failure rate (failures/unit length/yr): Specify how often the underground cable fails in a given time period usually one year. This parameter is only used
when the first two characters of the construction type defined in the dictionary are UG.
Underground repair time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to repair an underground cable once it has failed. As with the underground failure rate, this value will only
apply to construction types defined where the first two characters are UG.
Switch time (hr): Enter the amount of time it takes to open a switch. This parameter
applies only to those construction types that represent a switch branch in the raw data
file.
5. Click the OK button to save your specifications.
Select
Horizontal
Node
Vertical
Node
Point
Node
2-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To add a node:
1. On the Diagram Toolbar, click one of the three node symbols.
2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click. The node symbol displays on the diagram, centered on the pointer position (Figure 2-4).
The system automatically names consecutively the nodes you place on a diagram: Node1, Node2, Node3, etc.
NODE1
Select
Load
MWH
Load
Induction
Machine
Source
Harmonic Harmonic
Injection
Filter
Capacitor
Synchronous
Machine
Standard
Fault
Confidential
2-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Node1
Node1
b.
a.
Node1
c.
Line
Select
Switch
Transformer
Series Capacitor
Reactor
2-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click and hold down the mouse button (the branch symbol, highlighted, displays) while
dragging the branch symbol to the desired location (Figure 2-8b), and do one of the
following:
To connect to the end node: Position the pointer over the end node and release the
left mouse button.
To create a multipoint line (a jog in the branch): Move the pointer to the turning point
and release the mouse button. Move the pointer to the next turning point and click;
repeat as many times as necessary, and drag the pointer to the end node to complete
the branch (see Figure 2-8c).
Node2
Node2
Node2
a.
Node1
Node1
Node1
b.
c.
Confidential
2-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
New (Insert)
2-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. Enter a Description for the group you are creating. By default, this field is blank.
5. Select a color to use for this group. Color is used for color-coding the diagram by network group.
6. Click the Close button to save your group.
To view the group(s) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in a group:
1. Double-click on the item to display its property sheet.
2. Click the Groups button. The Group Membership dialog displays the list of the network groups you have defined (Figure 2-10). (If you havent defined any groups, it will
be empty.) Notice that each group to which the item belongs will have a check mark
next to its name.
Confidential
2-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Group option. The Add Item(s) to Group dialog displays
(Figure 2-11).
2-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
New (Insert)
Confidential
2-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
You can "unmark" items in the Members column by clicking once on the box that
precedes the item.
4. Enter a Description for the load category you are creating. By default, this field is blank.
5. Click the Close button to save your work.
To view the load category(ies) to which an item belongs and/or to change an items membership in
a load category:
1. Double-click on the load item to display its property sheet.
2. Click the Categories button. The Load Category Membership dialog displays the list
of the categories you have defined (Figure 2-13). (If you havent defined any categories, it will be empty.) Notice that each category to which the load item belongs will have
a check mark next to its name.
2-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click the Add Item(s) to>Load Category option. The Add Load(s) to Category
dialog displays (Figure 2-14).
Confidential
2-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Discount rate (pu/yr): The annual rate used to take into account the potential earning
power of money and inflation while moving dollar amounts either forward or backward
through time, to a single point in time for comparison.
Inflation rate (pu/yr): The expected yearly change in the value of the dollar.
Evaluation period (yr): The number of years, which will be studied in the economic
analysis.
Installation cost for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it costs
your utility to install a fixed capacitor bank.
Installation cost for switched capacitor banks (per kvar): The amount per kvar it
costs your utility to install a switched capacitor bank.
Maintenance rate for fixed capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr it
costs your utility to maintain a fixed capacitor bank.
Maintenance rate for switched capacitor banks (per kvar-yr): The rate per kvar-yr
it costs your utility to maintain a switched capacitor bank.
3. Click the OK button to save your specifications for the model.
If you are creating a new diagram, the root node will be set to the first in-service source
you place on the diagram.
If you are generating a new network and you do not place any source nodes on the diagram you
must specify the "root" node directly in the Network Property sheet.
During the iteration, if a node has been traversed already (a loop formed), the branch that has the
already encountered node at its downstream end is called a "loop branch". For example, in the network drawing in Figure 2-16, if the "root" node is "Source" and the item ordering method is set to
alphabetical, the iteration order of the nodes, starting at the source, would be as shown in Table 2-1.
Confidential
2-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1 23 W
0 .99
3 58 .28
BBBB
1.00
358.42
3 0.87
3 31 .79
Line 2
Line1
Switch1
306.74
355.82
27.9 2
174.87
L ine3
L ine5
2 8.95
3 43 .61
28.0 2
6.56
T ran1
XXXX
1.00
359.86
Y YY Y
1 .00
3 58 .93
5.74
89.67
Line4
0.00
76.1 0
AAA A
1.00
359.86
T ran2
Source
1.00
360.00
CCCC
0.00
86.56
2-16
Position in Tree
Node
Upstream Node
Source
AAAA
Source
XXXX
AAAA
YYYY
XXXX
BBBB
Source
123W
BBBB
CCCC
Source
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Branch
Upstream
Downstream
Line4
Source
AAAA
Line5
AAAA
XXXX
Line3*
XXXX
Source
Tran1
XXXX
YYYY
Line1
Source
BBBB
Line2
BBBB
123W
Tran2
Source
CCCC
The * is used to indicate a loop has been formed when the node "Source" is visited for the
second time. Line3 is then considered a "loop branch". The "*" is used here for explanatory
purposes only and will not be indicated on any output reports.
During the iteration process, any out-of-services branches are treated as if they have been removed
from the network.
To define the network item ordering method:
1. Choose Network>Ordering Method from the Main Menu. The Ordering Method dialog
displays (Figure 2-17).
Confidential
2-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When ordering numerically by node coordinate you must specify the following:
1. Choose the x coordinate (Horizontal) preference. This priority is used to determine left
to right or right to left ordering. If there is a tie, then Vertical priority will determine if the
top-most or bottom-most is selected next.
2. Choose the y coordinate (Vertical) preference. This priority is used to determine top
to bottom or bottom to top ordering. If there is a tie, then Horizontal Priority will determine if the left-most or right-most is selected next.
2-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
2-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Voltage units: Check the box to print the voltage units on the diagram (per-unit, kV, etc.).
Current/power units: Check the box to display current or power units on the printed page
(kW, kvar, Amps).
Active phase: Check the box to print the phase pertaining to the printed output results. For
example, if you have chosen to display results at Phase B, the page footer will indicate
phase B results.
Product Version: Check the box to print the produce version number on the printed page.
Date and Time: Check the box to print the date and time at the bottom of the printed page.
Page numbers: Check the box to print page numbers on each page.
White background: Check the box to print on a white background.
High-quality printing: Check the box for optimal print resolution (could significantly
increase printing time).
Confidential
2-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
PSS/ADEPT features What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG) printing of your network diagram, taking into account both the scrolled position and the scale of your diagram. Slight differences
may occur because the relative size of the paper is not the same as the size of the Diagram View
window, and because the resolution of the printing device is usually three or four times that of the
screen.
If the Multipage option is set in the Diagram Properties dialog, then the application will print the
entire diagram, using as many pages as necessary. To eliminate "blank" pages, you may need to
resize the diagram so that there is a minimal amount of white space around your network. If the
Multipage option is turned off, the current view will be printed on a single page (WYSIWYG) irregardless of the diagram size.
Each diagram printout will show the title of the network model, and the date and time in the upper
left and lower right of the paper, respectively. Also, the units of the displayed results will be shown
on the lower left of the printed page.
Confidential
2-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Progress View
2-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
2-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Pan
Zoom
Area
Zoom
Previous
Zoom
100%
Zoom
Extent
Zoom
Area
Zoom
Out
Diagram
Properties
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click on any drop-down menu option or toolbar button to adjust your Diagram View:
50%, 100%, 150%, 200%: Choose any one of these preset zoom levels at which to display your network diagram (these options are only available from the drop-down menu).
Zoom In: Choose this option to magnify your diagram.
Zoom Out: Choose this option to get a broader view of your diagram.
Zoom Area: Choose this option to zoom into a particular area of your diagram. Click
the Zoom Area
button. On the diagram, click and drag from upper left to lower right
to draw a rectangular frame around the area you want to magnify. Release the mouse
button to zoom into the area within the rectangle.
Zoom Extent: Choose this option to change the view of your diagram to one which
contains all of your network without white space.
Zoom Previous: Choose this option to restore the zoom level to what it was previously.
2-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. When the mouse is placed over the Diagram View, it will change to a Pan button. Left
click anywhere on the diagram and drag the entire display to a different position in the
window.
2-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Enter the name you want to call the saved view in the text box.
3. Click the Save button.
To restore a view:
1. Select the view you want to restore from the list provided.
2. Click the Restore button.
Click the Close button to return to the diagram.
Confidential
2-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
2-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE2
NODE1
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
There are 2 knee points and 3 line segments in the branch from NODE1 to NODE2. There is 1 knee
point and 2 line segments in the load. Originally, the line segments were drawn as one line segment
between NODE1 and NODE2 and one line segment indicating the load. To create the figure shown,
knee points were added to the original branch and load to allow the branch and load line segments
to be arranged as shown. Once a knee point is added, you can select it and drag the network item
to a desired location. Knee points are also created automatically when you draw a multipoint branch
(see Section 2.6, Adding a Branch).
To add a knee point to an existing branch or shunt item:
1. Select the knee point drawing tool
from the Diagram Toolbar and click on the
branch or shunt item where you want the knee point to be placed. A small maroon
square will become visible (see Figure 2-32) indicating that the knee point is selected.
NODE2
NODE1
Confidential
2-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE2
NODE1
a. Correct
NODE2
NODE1
b. Incorrect
Figure 2-33. Knee Point Selection for Delete
2-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button and choose the color that you want for the
2-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
2-37
-2
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
-1
- possible positions
- default position
-3
-4
2-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
2-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE2
Port
NODE1
NODE2
Link
NODE1
2. Single-click on the line segment you want to move. The port will now be visible
(Figure 2-38).
NODE2
NODE1
2-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. While holding the left mouse button down, position the cursor over the port and drag
the end of the link away from the port while also holding down the Ctrl key. A dashed
line will appear from the branch or shunt symbol to the mouse pointer indicating that
the link is being moved.
4. Position the link onto a different port on the busbar and release the mouse button and
Ctrl key.
To connect a branch or shunt item to a different node:
Follow Steps 1 to 3 as described above and position the link onto a different node symbol.
When moving symbols, a zoom level of no less than 100% is recommended.
Confidential
2-41
2-42
Confidential
Chapter 3
Editing a Network Model
3.1 Overview: Editing a Network Model
PSS/ADEPT provides a flexible editing environment to help you build and test network models.
Basic editing of all network items on the diagram or in the Equipment List View can be done using
standard Microsoft Windows selection, copy, cut, and paste functions. Detailed editing of the engineering settings associated with a network item can be done in PSS/ADEPTs item property sheets.
In this chapter, you will learn to:
Select single or multiple items on the diagram or from the Equipment List View.
Perform basic (Microsoft Windows) editing functions, such as copy, move, cut and
paste, undo last action, etc., for each type of network item.
Perform advanced editing functions via detailed network item property sheets,
including editing the property sheets for multiple like items.
Use enhanced features to better manage the workspace, scale loads and machines,
rephase the network, and create load snapshots.
Press:
Copy
Edit>Copy
Ctrl+C
Cut
Edit>Cut
Ctrl+X
Paste
Edit>Paste
Ctrl+V
Delete
Edit>Delete
Delete key
Edit>Undo
Ctrl+Z
Confidential
Click button:
3-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Change the format and display settings of cells in the Grid View.
Confidential
3-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To modify data in the Grid View, click the cell that you want to modify and enter the new value. Cells
can be of the following forms: text box, number, check box, or drop down lists. A drop down list will
appear when you have clicked the cell as shown in Figure 3-3. To view the list, click the down arrow
displayed within the cell itself and select the new value.
Confidential
3-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To sort a column of data in the Grid View, double-click in the column heading area of the column
you want to sort. Columns will be sorted in ascending order (Figure 3-4).
3-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To view the property sheet of a network item, double-click the row header, the first unlabeled column
of the Grid View (Figure 3-5). The Network Item Property sheet will display. Data modified on a Network Item Property sheet will be automatically updated in the Grid View when the OK button is
selected.
Confidential
3-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To paste one or several cells into the grid from the clipboard:
1. Select the cell or cells that you want to copy data into.
2. Choose Edit>Paste from the Grid menu.
3. Data will be pasted into the selected area.
3-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Dragging Line Color: Specifies the color of the line where a dragged column or row
will be dropped. You cannot drag rows or columns in PSS/ADEPT.
Background Color: Specifies the color of the background. The background is the
"gray area" outside of the grid itself.
Current Cell User Properties: Specify the type of border to apply to the selected cell.
3. Select OK to return to the Grid view.
Confidential
3-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Top margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the top side margin.
Bottom margin: Enter the number of inches from the edge of the printed page that you
want for the bottom side margin.
Row headers: Check the box to print the row headers on the printed page.
Column headers: Check the box to print the column headers on the printed page.
Print frame: Check the box to print a border frame around the outer edges of the grid
on the printed page.
Vertical lines: Check the box to print vertical lines between each row of the grid.
Horizontal lines: Check the box to print horizontal lines between each row of the grid.
Only black and white: Check the box to print the grid using only the colors of black
and white.
First rows, then Columns: Select this option to assign row, column printing order.
First columns, then Rows: Select this option to assign column, row printing order.
Center on Page, Vertical: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page vertically.
Center on Page, Horizontal: Select this option to center the grid on the printed page
horizontally.
Save settings to Profile: Check the box to save your settings to the Windows system
registry. Selecting this option allows the program to remember your previous settings
each time you open PSS/ADEPT.
3. Select OK to return to the Grid View.
3-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To preview the printed output, select File>Print Preview to view the printed output in a Print
Preview window (Figure 3-11).
3-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
3-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
Confidential
3-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
2. On the network diagram, click once over the first item you want to select.
3. Hold down the Ctrl key and click once on each nonadjacent item you want to select.
Do not click on the item label; if you do, all selected items will be deselected.
The items that you selected on the diagram or in the Equipment List View appear both in the diagram framed by solid block "handles", and in the Equipment List View as highlighted (Figure 3-15).
3-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
In the Equipment List View, click on the first item, hold down the Shift key and press
the End key. All items at all levels of the network will be selected.
Click once on any blank area on the diagram. If you click on a selected item, nothing
will happen.
In the Equipment List View, click the word Network at the top of the tree.
Confidential
3-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-24
Choose OK. Select Edit>Select>Tree. Only Static Load items will be selected.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
2. Move the pointer to the desired location in the diagram and click the left mouse button.
The text "Annotation" displays on the diagram. (You may repeat this step as many times
as needed).
3. Click the Select
4. Double-click the text Annotation to select it and display the Annotation Property sheet
(Figure 3-22).
Confidential
3-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
the node name. If you make yet another copy of the same node, PSS/ADEPT appends two tildes
(~~) to the node name, and so on.
Figure 3-23 shows a node named BUS1 that was copied and pasted onto the diagram. The Node
Property sheet shows the same information as for BUS1, with the new node name, BUS1~.
3-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Base Voltage (kV): Base voltage is the node base voltage in either line-to-line or lineto-neutral. If the node base voltage is not specified (for example, if you import a raw
data file that does not contain voltage information), the base voltage of the node
defaults to the system standard base voltage that was specified on the Network Property sheet (System tab).
Description: You may enter up to 40 characters to describe the node. A typical entry
in this field would signal where a node has a generator or a machine, and/or the type
of generator or machine located at a given node.
Position: Use the x and y boxes to set the x- and y-coordinates of the node in the diagram. These coordinates are arbitrary and define the location of the network nodes relative to the diagram origin (0,0), which is located at the bottom left corner of the
diagram.
Type: Click one of the options to set the type of the selected node on the diagram. A
network node can be presented as a point or as a busbar.
Rotation: If the node type is a busbar, enter the desired rotation. Horizontal busbars
have a rotation equal to zero degrees. Vertical busbars have a rotation of 90. Any rotation may be entered including fractions (e.g., 75.5).
Label configuration: If a point type node is specified, you can select where the node
label (e.g., name) is placed. Select from the list box provided to place the node label in
the desired position.
3. To display the node on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. To display node results on the diagram, click in the Results check box to place a check
mark.
5. To add the node to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the box that
precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the node properties.
Confidential
3-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE1
NODE1
Original
Position
Original
Position
Original
Position
Final
Position
NODE2
NODE1
Final
Position
Final
Position
NODE2
NODE2
3-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Line Length: The line length is the actual length of the branch. It is important that the
line length is consistent with the impedance units. For example, if the line length is
given in miles, then the impedance per unit length for the line must be specified in ohms
per mile. This is important because line length is used to calculate the total line
impedance.
Construction Type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier
that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select
one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter
your own (user-defined) unique construction type.
If you select a construction type from the list box, the impedance values defined with
that type in the Construction Dictionary will be displayed in the Impedance area of the
Line Property sheet; the values will not be editable. If you enter your own construction
type, you must enter the impedance values associated with the line in the Impedance
section of the Line Property sheet. PSS/ADEPT will save user-defined construction
types and their associated impedances to the PSS/U raw data file (*.dat) and/or the
native PSS/ADEPT native binary file (*.adp). User-defined line types are not saved to
the construction dictionary.
Impedance: Both positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance must be
specified in ohm per unit length. The positive-sequence and zero-sequence charging
admittance must be entered in micro-Siemens per unit length. Unit length is user
defined, and must coincide with the unit length used to specify the line/cable length.
You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you must enter the
impedance and admittance values; if you dont enter any values, PSS/ADEPT will
default to the displayed values.
Ratings: The line rating limits (amps) are used to determine whether a line is overloaded. You may specify up to four rating limits either obtained directly from the Construction Dictionary or when a user-defined construction type is indicated, your own
rating limits.
3. To display the line on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a check
mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected line is in service, click the In service check box, which is
the default setting. If In service is not checked, the line/cable is out of service and is
disconnected at both ends.
5. To display results for this line on the diagram, click once in the Results check box to
place a check mark there.
6. To add the selected line to an existing group(s), click the Groups button and click the
box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the line properties.
Confidential
3-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a line (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics module):
1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a line (Figure 3-27).
3-36
IEEE Line Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described
in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.5.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following:
To change the reliability properties for a line (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a line (Figure 3-28).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Confidential
3-37
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert
X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers
is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase
B is yellow, and phase C is blue.
Switch ID: Switch ID provides further identification for the specified switch. This identifier may be from one to three characters in length. This field is provided for PSS/U
compatibility only.
Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier
that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select
one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter
your own (user-defined) unique construction type. Though switches have zero impedance, rating values are retrieved from the Construction Dictionary and used to calculate
whether a switch is overloaded.
Ratings: The switch rating limit (amps) is used to determine overloads. You may specify up to four switch rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your own userdefined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type was specified.
Tie switch: Click the Tie switch box (a check mark displays) to specify a tie switch.
For PSS/ADEPT calculations, there is no difference between a switch and a tie switch.
Tie switches are provided for PSS/U compatibility only.
Connection circuit: If the Tie switch box is checked, you may enter a one- to eightcharacter connection circuit identifier. The connection circuit identifier is used to specify
the circuit to which the tie switch is connected and is provided for compatibility with
PSS/U.
Status: The switch status may be either open or closed. If the switch is open, it is
assumed that the switch branch is disconnected at both ends.
TOPO status: TOPO (Tie Open Point Optimization) status is only used with the
optional TOPO module to specify whether the switches are allowed to operate during
a TOPO analysis. In TOPO, if the switches are unlocked they are free to open and
close while the TOPO algorithm is executing. If the status is set to locked, the switches
will remain in their current position, either open or closed.
3. To display the switch on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this switch on the
diagram.
5. To add the selected switch to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the switch properties.
Confidential
3-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the reliability properties for a switch (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a switch (Figure 3-30).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
3-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-41
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
designation A, B, and C mean the first winding, second winding, and third winding.
Thus, if a wye-delta (+30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the
wye side of the transformer from phase A to ground exists, and the winding on the delta
side from C to A is installed. Conversely, if a wye-delta (-30) transformer with A phasing is specified, the winding on the wye side of the transformer is still phase A to
ground, but the winding on the delta side from A to B is installed. Refer to Appendix A,
Section A.1.2 for more information about phasing.
Type: Select the transformer connection type:
Wye-Wye
Wye-Delta (30)
Delta-Wye (30)
Delta-Delta
Wye Auto
Z Wye (30)
Z Wye (150)
Wye-Wye +180
3-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
voltages, e.g., a 13.8 kV transformer being used on a 13.2 kV system. To set the transformer voltage independently:
a. Place a check mark in the box labeled User defined. The FROM and TO
voltage fields will become enabled.
b. Change the FROM side and/or TO side voltage of the transformer.
Impedance: All transformers require a leakage impedance; some units also require a
second impedance to be specified. A few of the transformers also require a second
impedance; the field for entering this second impedance will be enabled when it is
needed. Some transformers can have grounding impedances on the FROM, TO or on
both sides. Again, the required fields will be enabled when needed. The impedance values needed for each type of transformer, is shown below.
Type
Required Values
Leakage Impedance
FROM Side Grounding Impedance
Delta-Wye (30)
Leakage Impedance
TO Side Grounding Impedance
Leakage Impedance
Leakage Impedance
Grounding Impedance
Leakage Impedance
Zero Sequence Impedance
FROM Side Grounding Impedance
Confidential
3-43
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5. Place a check mark in the box labeled Results to display results for this transformer on
the diagram.
6. Click the Tap Control tab (Figure 3-32) and enter/select the Tap Control properties for
your transformer.
Taps in the phases are adjusted independently of each other. For Z-Wye transformers independent tap adjustment cannot be selected
Taps in all phases are ganged together and have the same setting. The first
set of taps control the operation; the others follow. For example, with a phase
ABC Wye-Wye transformer, the phase A taps adjust to control the phase A
voltage of the regulated node.
Taps locked in present position in which the transformer taps will remain
"locked" in their current tap position for all subsequent loadflows.
Tap Settings: Specify the present position of the three taps, the Max and Min possible
tap settings, and the tap change increment (step). Manually, you can set the taps to
any value within the possible range; they do not have to be set at one of the increments.
However, if the taps are adjusted during any subsequent loadflow they will moved so
3-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
they correspond to one of the increments. After setting the taps manually, if you do not
want them moved during a subsequent loadflow, the "Taps locked in present position"
option should be selected.
For auto wye transformers, the load changing tap side can be designated as either the
TO or FROM side. The taps on the other side can then be used as no load taps.
Time delay: There are situations where, two or more transformers, two or more capacitor banks, or a combination of transformers and capacitor banks may be regulated by
voltage at some location in a network. In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor
bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage. The time delay is used
to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the order in which they attempt
control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate before controllers with a long
time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are first used to correct voltage
problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream of the first be used. Time
delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units are assumed.
7. Click the Regulation tab (Figure 3-33) and enter/select additional Tap Control properties for your transformer:
Confidential
3-45
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-47
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the harmonic properties for a transformer (visible if you are licensed for the harmonics
module):
1. Click the Harmonics tab to modify the harmonic properties of a transformer
(Figure 3-35).
3-48
IEEE Model Represents an IEEE line. The modeling of an IEEE Line is described
in Chapter 8, Section 8.9.6.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For custom types, enter the requested values for the following:
To change the reliability properties for a transformer (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA
module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a transformer (Figure 3-36).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Confidential
3-49
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
a series capacitor/reactor name, the names of the nodes between which it is connected
will not change.
Phasing: The phasing value indicates which phase conductors are present in the network model. In PSS/ADEPT, the available phasing values are specified using any combination of the three characters A, B, and C (e.g., ABC, AB, BC, CA, A, B, and C). You
must select one of the phasing values from the list; you cannot create your own values.
If XYZ phasing was specified in a PSS/U raw data file, PSS/ADEPT will convert
X to A, Y to B, and Z to C. When the diagram property to display phase markers
is selected, phasing is indicated on the one-line diagram where phase A is red, phase
B is yellow, and phase C is blue.
Nameplate rating (kVA/phase): The nameplate rating is the per-phase kVA rating of
the series capacitor or reactor. It is used only (along with the FROM node base voltage)
to convert the pu impedances into ohm.
Construction type: Construction type is a 1- to 10-character alphanumeric identifier
that refers to a construction type defined in the Construction Dictionary. You may select
one of the construction types available in the Construction Dictionary, or you may enter
your own (user-defined) unique construction type.
Impedance: Positive-sequence and zero-sequence resistance and reactance for
series capacitors and reactors is specified in pu on the kVA base of the series capacitor/ reactor. You will not be able to edit these fields if you selected a construction type
from the Construction Dictionary. If you created your own construction type, you will be
able to enter impedance values.
Ratings: The series capacitor/reactor rating limits (pu on series capacitor/reactor kVA
base) are used to determine whether the series device is overloaded. You may specify
up to four series capacitor/reactor rating limits from the Construction Dictionary or your
own user-defined limits in the case where a user-defined construction type has been
specified.
3. To display the series capacitor/reactor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check
box to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected series capacitor/reactor is in service, click the In service
check box, which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the series capacitor/reactor is out of service and is disconnected at both ends.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display results for this series capacitor/reactor on the
diagram.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the series capacitor/reactor properties.
Confidential
3-51
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the reliability properties for a series capacitor/reactor (visible only if you are licensed for
the DRA module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a series capacitor/reactor
(Figure 3-39).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.2 for further instructions.
Confidential
3-53
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
NODE2
NODE1
NODE1
NODE1
3-54
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-55
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-56
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
available generation and the type of load specified at a node. Refer to Chapter 4,
Section 4.4.3 for information on static load modeling in a load flow solution.
Load balance: Specify the load as either balanced or unbalanced. Balanced loads
require you to enter total values over all phases.
Load connection: Specify the load connection as either grounded or ungrounded. Do
not apply grounded-wye loads to a node where no neutral wire exists (i.e., ungrounded
delta system). In this situation, specify a delta-connected load.
Load Values: If the load is balanced, enter total kW, kvar (rectangular), or total apparent power S and a leading/lagging pf (polar). PSS/ADEPT will automatically divide the
total load specified by the number of phases present. If the load is unbalanced, enter
the kW, kvar (rectangular), or S and pf leading/lagging (polar) for phases A, B, and C.
Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the load
(ohms).
3. To display the static load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place
a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected static load is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this static load on the
diagram.
6. To add the selected load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click the
box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button,
and click the box that precedes the load category you want. Click the OK button to
accept the assignment.
8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
Confidential
3-57
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For additional details on the modeling of a static load in harmonics analysis, please refer to Chapter
8, Section 8.9.1.
3-58
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To change the reliability properties for a static load (visible only if you are licensed for the DRA
module):
1. Click the DRA tab to modify the reliability properties of a static load (Figure 3-43).
2. Refer to Chapter 9, Section 9.4.3 for further instructions.
Confidential
3-59
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2
C* 1.0 0.4*C + 0.4* C + 40
0.005925 * E0.885
kWh/consumer/month
SCAL
A factor to scale down the load in each line section so that the sum of the line
section loads is equal to the REA Bulletin 45-2 formula applied to the total number of consumers in the feeder and the total kWh/consumer/month for the
feeder.
The B Factor is the factor used to determine the diversity of load/consumer. The default factor of
0.885 is in the REA demand equation shown in the REA Bulletin 45-2 and may be changed in
Analysis Options>General.
Consumer loads are entered into the program by specifying the number of consumers and megawatt-hours. The load data is the total amount for the line section or node. The megawatt-hours are
the total kilowatt-hours/1000 used by the consumers for a period of one month.
Consumer loads are converted to kW on a per phase basis regardless of whether the loads are
assigned to a node as balanced or unbalanced. If the loads are entered as balanced loads, then
the program divides the loads evenly among the available phases and converts them to kW with
the REA demand equation. Resultant kW values must be set to zero in order for a re-calculation to
occur. To do this, use the multiple edit functionality to set selected MWh load data at one time.
Because the conversion of general consumer loads to kW is based on the total number of consumers and energy consumed as well as the loads of the individual line sections, the boundaries
are defined by groups. If a group served by a substation is modeled in the network, then each
should be assigned its own group name. Each substation loading that is modeled may be scaled to
the actual metered value based on the total consumer loads of its own service area (group).
When MWh load is present in the system, the consumer load is converted to kW via a non-linear
formula. The formula is linearized, by multiplying the kW by a scale factor. This scale factor is calculated using the following formula:
Scale factor = kW factor kW individual
kW factor = a b
The node group where the MWh load is connected will be used to define these sections.All nodes
in the same group are linearized as one section with each group being linearized separately. In
some cases you may want to ignore the group boundaries and linearize the system as a whole. To
linearize the whole system, select Analysis>Options and choose to linearize by Tree.
3-60
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-61
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Concentrated at the node: This option allows you to choose between dividing the
loads equally between the FROM and the TO nodes of a line or placing all of the load
at the TO node of the line branch. The default is concentrated at the node or lump all
of the consumer load at the TO end. To specify a non-concentrated load, remove the
check mark from the box next to Concentrated at the node.
Percent constant impedance: You can select the percentage of the load to be treated
as constant impedance load rather than constant kVA load. When MWh loads are converted, this percentage will be used to determine the amount of constant impedance
load. The remaining portion will be converted and stored as constant power load. The
default value is 0% constant impedance.
Load values: If the load is balanced, enter the total MWH/month, the number of consumers, the average power factor for the load, and the resultant kW over all phases. If
the load is unbalanced, enter each of these values for each of the three phases. If you
specify a resultant kW value of zero, the program will calculate the equivalent peak load
demand.
3. To display the MWh load on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place
a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected MWh load is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this MWh load on the
diagram.
6. To add the selected MWh load to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and
click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. To add the selected load to an existing load category(ies), click the Categories button
and click the box that precedes the category name you want. Click the OK button to
accept the assignment.
8. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the static load properties.
3-62
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
kVA BASE
X 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA-3 1000
if an angle (1) is available for the fault MVA we have:
kVA BASE 1
Z 1 = ----------------------------------------MVA-3 1000
therefore,
R 1 = Z 1 cos ( 1 )
X 1 = Z 1 sin ( 1 )
2. Determine the zero-sequence impedance from the single-phase fault MVA (MVA-1):
3 kVA BASE
- 2X 1
X = ----------------------------------------MVA-1 1000
where X 1 was calculated above. Again, if the angle () of the fault MVA is known, we
can determine the complex impedance as follows:
3 kVA BASE
- 2Z 1 1
Z = ----------------------------------------------MVA-1 1000
where 1 and Z 1 are known from (1) above.
Confidential
3-63
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-64
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
source, the angle will be used if part of the system had an angle shift due to wye-delta
or delta-wye transformer connections.
Scheduled voltage (pu of nominal): The scheduled voltage of the source node in per
unit of nominal voltage. This is the scheduled voltage of the source that can be either
greater than or less than the per unit nominal voltage of the source.
Positive sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify
the positive-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system
kVA base.
Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu on system kVA base): Specify the
zero-sequence source Thevenin resistance and reactance in pu on the system kVA
base.
Grounding resistance and reactance (ohms): Enter the resistance and reactance of
the grounding impedance of the source in absolute physical units.
3. To display the source on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this source on the
diagram.
5. To add the selected source to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
6. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the source properties.
Confidential
3-65
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For additional information on harmonics modeling for sources, please refer to Chapter 8.
3-66
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-67
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
hp (NEMA)
kW (IEC)
Real electrical power at machine input terminal (must be kW): Select this option if
you want to specify real electrical power at the machine input terminal.
3-68
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Mechanical power at machine shaft (hp or kW): Select this option if you want to
specify mechanical power at the machine shaft.
Terminal real power (+) consumed, (-) delivered: If you have selected the real electrical power option, enter the terminal real power. Positive values indicate power will be
consumed, negative values indicate power will be delivered.
Shaft power (+) motor, (-) generator: If you have selected the shaft power option,
enter the shaft power. Positive values will indicate a motor; negative values will indicate
a generator.
Mechanical rating: Enter the electrical rating of the machine in kW or hp. This value
is used to convert per-unit impedances into ohms; kW or hp is indicated by the mechanical power units you have previously specified.
Rated (nominal) terminal voltage (kV): Nominal voltage of the machine is either lineto-line or line-to-neutral machine voltage in kV, depending on the input voltage flag you
selected in the Network Property sheets System tab. If no voltage is specified, the voltage of the node where this machine is connected will be used as the nominal machine
voltage. This value is used along with the nominal machine size to convert pu impedances into ohm.
Grounding impedance: Enter the grounding resistance and reactance of the induction machine (ohms).
3. To display the induction machine on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box
(under the Main tab) to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected induction machine is in service, click the In service check
box (under the Main tab), which is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the
induction machine is out of service.
5. Check the box labeled Results to display analysis results for this induction machine on
the diagram.
6. To add the selected induction machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups button,
and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept
the assignment.
7. To add the selected induction machine to an existing load category(ies), click the
Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load
category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
Confidential
3-69
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-48) and enter/select the impedances for the induction machine.
3-70
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Outer cage R (pu): The resistance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine
base.
Outer cage X (pu): The reactance of the outer cage winding in pu on the machine
base.
Locked rotor R and X (pu): The locked rotor resistance and reactance is used to
determine the starting current of the machine in the motor starting calculation. This
value is automatically calculated for each standard NEMA design type A, B, C, D, or E.
NEMA design type B is the default for all induction machines imported from a PSS/U
raw data file.
Magnetizing X (pu): The magnetizing (air gap) reactance of the machine. Reactance
is given in pu on the machine base.
NEMA design type: PSS/ADEPT supports five standard NEMA class design induction
machines: type A, B, C, D, and E. The standard characteristics of these machines are
used to calculate the induction machine equivalent circuit parameters (see
Appendix E). Selection of a specific design type will cause the impedance values to be
recalculated.
Subtransient X (pu): The subtransient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine
base.
Transient X (pu): The transient reactance of the machine in pu on the machine base.
The induction machine torque, current and power factor versus speed plot is displayed.
You can select to display torque, current, or speed by placing a check mark next to the
text provided.
Confidential
3-71
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-49) and enter/select the starting transformer information that will be used in a motor starting analysis.
3-72
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For additional information on harmonics modeling for induction machines, please refer to Chapter
8, Section 8.9.2.
Confidential
3-73
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Under the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the synchronous machine:
Name: Specify a unique name for the synchronous machine on the PSS/ADEPT diagram. This is not the name of the node to which the machine is connected. The node
name appears on the property sheet to indicate the location of the machine in the network. If you modify the machine name, the name of the node to which it is attached will
not be affected.
Machine type: Select the type of machine from the following: Constant power, PV
Machine, or Swing Source.
A PV Machine
A swing source
Confidential
3-75
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing group(s), click the Groups
button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the group name you want.
Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
7. To add the selected synchronous machine to an existing category(ies), click the
Categories button (under the Main tab), and click the box that precedes the load
category you want. Click the OK button to accept the assignment.
8. Click the Impedances tab (Figure 3-52) to view the impedance properties for the synchronous machine.
3-76
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Steam turbine large: The associated impedances for a large (several hundred MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in
the fields on the property sheet.
Steam turbine small: The associated impedances for a small (less than 100
MW round rotor machine) steam turbine will be automatically placed in the
fields on the property sheet.
Hydro w/ damper: The associated impedances for a hydro with damper windings (salient pole machine with damper windings) will be automatically placed
in the fields on the property sheet.
Hydro w/o damper: The associated impedances for a hydro machine (salient
pole) without damper windings will be automatically placed in the fields on the
property sheet.
Has damper windings: Indicate whether the machine has damper windings by clicking within the box. A check mark indicates the machine has damper windings. This
option is only available for custom, and hydro impedance models with a salient pole
rotor type.
Reactances
Synchronous reactance (pu): The direct and quadrature synchronous reactance of the machine
Time constants
Confidential
Open circuit subtransient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis (Daxis) and quadrature-axis (Q-axis). The default is 0.35 seconds.
Open circuit transient (sec): The time constant for the direct-axis and
quadrature-axis. The default value is 7.0 seconds.
3-77
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Impedances
Locked rotor resistance and reactance (pu): The locked rotor resistance
and reactance of the machine is used to determine the starting current of the
machine in motor starting analysis.
Zero sequence resistance and reactance (pu): The zero-sequence impedance of the machine specified in pu.
Saturation Coefficients
Mechanical
9. Click the Start-Up tab (Figure 3-53) and enter/select the start-up properties for the synchronous machine.
3-78
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-79
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-80
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For additional information on harmonics modeling for synchronous machines, please refer to
Chapter 8, Section 8.9.3.
Confidential
3-81
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-82
Regulated Node: If this node is specified and it is not the same node on which
the capacitor is located, then PSS/ADEPT will monitor the voltage at this regulated node.
Minimum and Maximum Regulated Voltage (pu): Specify the minimum and
maximum voltage allowed at the regulated node.
Switching Priority: If there is more than one switched capacitor regulating the
same node, you can specify a priority to indicate the order in which the capacitor is switched on. This option is provided for raw data compatibility and is not
currently used in PSS/ADEPT.
Fraction Switched In: Indicates the fraction of the kvar used, where 1.0
(100%) uses all kvar and 0.0 (0%) uses no kvar. This fraction does not indicate
in-service status. PSS/ADEPT can adjust this fraction in the load flow solution
when the capacitor switching option is turned on (see Chapter 4,
Section 4.4.1).
Ungrounded: Check this box if the capacitor bank is not fully grounded.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Time delay: There are situations where voltage at some location in a network may be
influenced by two or more transformers (capacitor banks). In such situations, the transformer tap (capacitor bank) controllers may fight one another trying to control voltage.
The time delay is used to prevent these controllers from interacting by defining the
order in which they attempt control. Controllers with a short time delay will operate
before controllers with a long time delay. A short time delay (i.e., zero) is generally
assigned to transformer tap controller closest to the source; increasingly longer time
delays are assigned to downstream controllers. In this way, upstream transformers are
first used to correct voltage problems. Only if unsuccessful will controllers downstream
of the first be used. Time delay is a floating-point number (e.g., 1.5). No specific units
are assumed.
3. To display the capacitor on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to place a
check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected capacitor is in service, click the In service check box,
which is the default setting. Note that a capacitor bank may be in service even though
the fraction switched in is equal to zero.
5. To display analysis results on the diagram for this capacitor, place a check mark in the
box labeled Results.
6. To add the selected capacitor to an existing group(s), click the Groups button, and click
the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept the
assignment.
7. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the capacitor properties.
three-phase-to-ground
phase-to-ground
phase-to-phase
phase-to-phase-to-ground
ungrounded three-phase
For all fault types that are not three-phase-to-ground or ungrounded three-phase, you must specify
the phase at which the fault occurs. If you select the phase-to-ground through impedance fault type,
the impedance values display.
The fault impedance may be entered and adjusted from the Analysis Options Property sheet
under the Short Circuit tab (Chapter 4, Figure 4-15).
Confidential
3-83
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-84
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-85
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button and, in the entry space that appears, type a name for
6. Press the Enter key. The system prompts "Save new workspace?"
7. Click the Yes button to save the workspace.
To delete an existing workspace:
1. Choose File>Workspace>Open from the Main Menu. The Open Workspace dialog
displays.
2. Click (and highlight) the name of the workspace you want to delete.
3. Click the Delete
button, and in the entry space that appears, type a name for
3-86
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Load scaling allows you to change the real and imaginary power consumed by loads
on the network.
Machine scaling allows you to modify the power drawn or supplied by synchronous
and induction machines connected to the network. Optionally, you may modify machine
capacity.
MWh load scaling allows you to change the number of consumers, MWh/month,
average power factor and resultant kW.
In each case, the scaling is applied to items currently selected. You may select a single load or
machine, or you may select a group of items that includes loads or machines. Scaling will then be
applied only to items of the appropriate type.
In both cases, scaling can result in a value of zero. This means that further scaling will have
no effect since all scaling is done with multiplication. If you want to change a quantity that has
a value of zero you will have to assign it a nonzero value in the appropriate item property sheet.
Confidential
3-87
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Multiply P&Q by: Allows you to apply a fixed scale factor to both P and Q.
Scale P&Q so total P is: Allows you to specify a desired total value for P from
which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q.
Scale P&Q so total Q is: Allows you to specify a desired value for Q from
which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q.
Scale P&Q so total S is: Allows you to specify a desired value for S from
which a scale factor will be calculated and applied to both P and Q.
Multiply Q by: Applies the specified scale factor to Q only for all selected
loads.
Adjust Q, leave P constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value for
power factor. A scale factor for Q will be calculated, holding P constant, to
achieve the desired pf.
Adjust P&Q, leave S constant so pf is: Allows you to specify a desired value
for power factor, and will scale P and Q independently to keep S constant.
3-88
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Totals section displays the totals for the loads in the current selection. It contains the total
number of loads and the total power for the selected loads expressed as real and imaginary
power (P and Q) as well as apparent power and power factor (S and pf).
Confidential
3-89
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Scale machines supplying real power; or machines drawing real power; or both
(drawing and supplying real power).
Scale type: Specify the scale factor. You may choose to specify the scale factor
directly or to have the program calculate a scale factor to achieve a desired power level.
4. Click the Apply button to scale the loads.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Pschedorig x
Qschednew =
Qschedorig x
Adjustments are made to the active and reactive power values of all phases in the
load.
Induction machines:
Pschednew =
Pschedorig x
Sizenew
Sizeorig
Machine base size is only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power
together is selected.
Confidential
3-91
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Synchronous machines:
Pschednew =
Pschedorig x
Sizenew
Sizeorig
Qminnew
Qminorig
Qmaxnew
Qmaxorig
Machine base size and the minimum and maximum reactive Var limits are only modified if the option to adjust machine base and power together is selected.
where:
Psched
Qsched
Size
Qmin
Qmax
To scale loads:
1. Select a single static load, synchronous machine or induction machine, or a group of
loads and machines on the Diagram or Tree View. Optionally, the branch whose power
(or current) is to be targeted may also be included in the selection.
Since the scaling operates on a selection, use the selection tools provided to select the
loads to be scaled. If you wish to scale a particular set of loads, use the selection tool
in combination with the selection filter.
2. Choose Network>Automatic Load Scaling from the Main Menu. The Automatic Load
Scaling dialog will be displayed (Figure 3-62). The static loads and machines selected
will be displayed along with their corresponding power totals.
3-92
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-93
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Measurement Node: Allows for the selection of either the FROM or TO end of the
selected line to measured.
The selection of the measured Line, Switch, Transformer or Series Capacitor, along
with the specification of the FROM or TO end will cause the corresponding Average
current, Maximum current and Total KVA values to be displayed in the Original and Target boxes within the window. The Original values provide information for the measured
branch and cannot be modified.
Measurements: Choose one of the measurement types and enter a corresponding
Target Value for the measured Line, Transformer, Switch or Series Capacitor.
Average Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the
average phase current at the metered end of the selected branch.
Maximum Current, Amps: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the
maximum phase current at the metered end of the selected branch.
Total KVA: Allows you to specify a desired target value for the total KVA at the
metered end of the selected branch.
A new Target Value may be directly entered into the field provided, or the value shown
can be increased or decreased in blocks of 10 by clicking on the corresponding "up" or
"down" arrows to the right of the Target Value fields.
Load Group/Loads: All selected static loads, induction machines and synchronous
machines are recorded in the list box.
Adjust machine base and power together: This option is only activated when an
induction machine or synchronous machine is highlighted ("clicked on") within the list
box. When activated, a check mark in this box will cause the machine base and power
of the corresponding machine to be scaled together. Otherwise, only the machines
power is scaled.
The Totals section provides information on the selected loads and machines and
may not be modified. The following information is provided:
3-94
The total number of static loads selected, total power expressed as real and
imaginary power (P and Q), apparent power (S), and power factor (pf).
The total number of induction and synchronous machines selected, total real
power and total size.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. On the Options tab, various solution parameters may be defined and selected
(Figure 3-64).
Confidential
3-95
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Max Scale Factor Value: Sets the maximum acceptable value of the scale factor. If
the scale factor is calculated to be below this value, then automatic load scaling will terminate with an error message.
Adjust Switched Capacitors: If you select this option, all switched capacitor banks
will be allowed to adjust during the scaling operation. The value is adjusted based on
the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node specified
on the Capacitor Property sheet. If this option is not selected, the status of switched
capacitor banks will not be changed during the load scaling analysis.
Adjust Transformer Taps: If you select this option, all transformers will be adjustable
during the scaling operation. If this option is not selected, all transformer tap adjustment
is blocked, regardless of the status of individual transformers. In this situation, the
transformer taps will be locked to the current settings specified in the Transformer
Property sheet.
5. Click the OK button to perform the automatic load scaling. If the load scaling is successful, the results are displayed in a new Load Scaling Results dialog (Figure 3-65).
3-96
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Scheduled P (KW): The scheduled real power in KW with the new scale factor applied.
Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total power value for
synchronous and induction machines.
Original Q (Kvar): The actual reactive power in kVar, listed by phase (A,B,C) for each
static load, synchronous machine and induction machine.
Scheduled Q (Kvar): The scheduled reactive power in kVar with the new scale factor
applied. Values are listed by phase (A,B,C) for static loads and as a single total reactive
power value for synchronous machines. An "N/A" (Not Applicable) is indicated for
induction machines.
6. Click the OK button to accept the results, or the Cancel button to reject the results and
return to the main Automatic Load Scaling window. When OK is selected, the following
dialog will appear (Figure 3-66).
Confidential
3-97
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B A
Line1
Single-Phase
Section
B A
Single-Phase
Section
Line1
b.
a.
3-98
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description of
what was done
Lines, wye-wye
transformers,
switches, series
capacitors/reactors
Wye-connected shunts
(includes
faults)
Delta-connected shunts
delta-delta transformers
delta-connected
auto regulators
delta faults
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip B & C
Flip B & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & B
Flip A & B
Flip A & B
Flip B & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & C
Flip A & B
The changes for shunt devices apply only to those that are unbalanced, no changes are needed for
three-phase balanced shunts. Since capacitors are presently available as balanced only, no change
needs to be made to them. Figure 3-68 shows an example of how to handle an unbalanced load for
the "rotate forward" situation, which means that A goes to B, B goes to C, and C goes to A.
Before
After
kW
kvar
kW
kvar
Phase A
300.00
100.00
150.00
150.00
Phase B
200.00
50.00
300.00
100.00
Phase C
150.00
150.00
200.00
50.00
Confidential
3-99
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table 3-2 shows what happens to a delta-wye transformer branch during rephasing. Table 3-3
shows the rephasing operations for a wye-delta transformer connection.
Table 3-2. Changes to Delta-Wye Transformers
Wire
Change
C
A
B
C
Delta-wye -30
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip A&C,
change to delta-wye -30
Flip A&C,
change to delta-wye +30
Flip A & B
Flip B&C,
change to delta-wye -30
Flip B&C,
change to delta-wye +30
Flip A & C
Flip A&B,
change to delta-wye -30
Flip A&B,
change to delta-wye +30
Change
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
Nothing
Nothing
Nothing
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate forward
Rotate back
Rotate back
Rotate back
Flip B & C
Flip B & C,
change to wye-delta +30
Flip B & C,
change to wye-delta -30
Flip A & B
Flip A & B,
change to wye-delta +30
Flip A & B,
change to wye-delta -30
Flip A & C
Flip A & C,
change to wye-delta +30
Flip A & C,
change to wye-delta -30
3-100
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
3-101
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3-102
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To edit a load snapshot: Click on the snapshot you want to edit, and make your
changes.
The controls to the right of the Snapshot list box are updated based on the currently selected (not active) snapshot. When no snapshot is selected, these controls are disabled. If the currently selected snapshot is "Base", only the relative duration
and description fields are available.
3. Enter/select the information for the load snapshot:
Relative Duration (pu): Enter the relative duration of the snapshot. The default duration value is 1.0, which is used by TOPO and CAPO.
Scaling: For each snapshot, you can choose to scale static loads, machines (both
induction and synchronous), or both. If you choose to scale machines, you can scale
real power only, or real power and machine size.
Load Category: Select the load category to scale. If no load categories exist, load
snapshots will be meaningless.
Scale Factor: Specify the scale factor for the selected snapshot and category. Each
snapshot has a unique scale factor for each load category that has been defined. The
default scale factor is 1.0. For example, suppose you have two load categories, labeled
"Industrial" and "Residential" and you are in the process of creating a snapshot called
"Night." You may want to scale loads belonging to "Industrial" by 0.2 and loads belonging to "Residential" by 0.6. To do this, select the "Night" snapshot, then select "Industrial" from the Load Category list and enter "0.2" in the scale factor field. Then select
"Residential" and enter "0.6" in the scale factor field.
Description: Enter a text description for the currently selected snapshot. This field is
left blank by default.
Active Snapshot: At the bottom left of the property sheet, designate any snapshot
from the drop-down list to make it the active snapshot. Only one snapshot can be active
at a time. This is the snapshot that will be used for load flow, etc.
4. Click the Close button to finish defining your snapshot.
If there is an active snapshot other than the "Base" in which the static loads option
is set (a check mark appears in the Static Loads option), the Static Load Property
sheet will display scaled load values; you will not be able to edit these values. If there
is an active snapshot in which the Machines option is set, the Induction Machine and
Synchronous Machine Property sheet will display scaled values for real power and
(optionally) machine size; you will not be able to edit these values. This is to ensure
that the original load values are preserved.
Confidential
3-103
3-104
Confidential
Chapter 4
Analyzing Network Models
4.1 Overview: Analyzing Network Models
PSS/ADEPT performs load flow, short circuit, and motor starting analyses on a distribution network
that consists of any number of nodes and devices. PSS/ADEPT has no node or equipment limitation; the only limitation is on the hardware of the host PC. PSS/ADEPT uses an iterative Y-Bus
relaxation method to achieve solutions.
The PSS/ADEPT algorithm is more robust than the solution technique used by the PSS/U application; it can handle systems from highly meshed networks to weak radial systems with large electrical
generation far from the loads. Systems that were difficult to solve using PSS/U should be easier to
solve in PSS/ADEPT. The load flow solution in PSS/ADEPT may require more iterations to reach a
stable solution, but the total solution time will be about the same as the time required to solve a load
flow network in PSS/U Revision 8.3.
Additionally, the Tie Open Point Optimization (TOPO) will find the minimum loss configuration for a
three-phase radial system, and the Optimal Capacitor Placement (CAPO) places fixed and
switched three-phase capacitor banks of specified size to minimize system losses.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Confidential
4-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Determining Phases at a Node: When placing shunt capacitors and balanced loads
at a node, PSS/ADEPT distributes the specific load evenly over the phases existing at
the node. The existing phases are determined by the branch phasing coming into it. For
example, if there are two branches coming into a node, one with phasing AB and the
other with phasing BC, the phasing of the node will be ABC.
Line-to-Line
(Delta-Connected)
Line-to-Neutral
(Wye-Connected)
A-to-B
A-to-neutral
B-to-C
B-to-neutral
C-to-A
C-to-neutral
4-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Choose Network>Validate from the Main Menu. The validation check runs immediately and the results display in the Progress View (Figure 4-2).
Choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu. Click the Load Flow tab, and click
the Validate network before solving option (a check mark appears in the box). When
you run an analysis, PSS/ADEPT automatically runs the validation operation, reports
the results of the validation check to you, and carries out the analysis regardless of the
validation outcome (no changes are made to your data).
If a device is reported in the Progress View, you can double-click on the name of the device
to locate and select it on the Diagram and Equipment List Views. The item property sheet can
then be accessed by double-clicking on the selected item.
4-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Set the analysis information displays, such as detailed convergence monitors, voltage
thresholds, and graphical convergence monitor settings.
Set display options for load flow, short circuit, motor starting, CAPO, and TOPO
analyses results.
Confidential
4-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Click the General tab and select/enter the analysis options you want:
Create PSS/Engines hub file: PSS/ADEPT can create a file,...\example\network.dmp, that tracks user actions and problems. PTI support personnel may request
that you generate and provide this file for problem analysis purposes. This option is
also used to export data to PSS/Engines.
Branch rating index: Specify the rating index (1-4) to use for determining branch overloads. At present, up to four ratings may be entered in the Construction Dictionary or
specified on individual item property sheets.
% loading: Specify the percent of loading used to calculate branch overloads. The
default is to report overloads for branches that are above 100% of their rating value.
Voltage thresholds: Select the low- and high-voltage thresholds for flagging nodes,
which are over/undervoltage, pu of node base voltage.
Power factor limit: Select the upper limit for flagging branches, which have a power
factor (pf) below this specified limit.
Voltage unbalance: Select the method to calculate voltage unbalance. Enter the voltage unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of
the voltage unbalance report.
Current unbalance: Select the method to calculate current unbalance. Enter the current unbalance upper limit used to color code the diagram and to select the contents of
the current unbalance report.
MWh load linearization: Select the method to use when linearizing MWh loads. Enter
the MWh load B-factor. The default method is by group. The default B-factor is 0.885.
3. Click the OK button to save the settings. These settings are saved with the diagram
when you request to save a native binary file (*.adp).
You may also set the display of specific analysis results on the diagram Load
Flow, Short Circuit, Motor Starting, CAPO, and TOPO. Refer to Section 4.3.3 in
this chapter for more information.
4-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To color code items by category: Select Loads and Machines by Category. This
option does not apply to analysis results.
To color code unbalanced nodes and branches: Select Unbalanced nodes,
branches and select a color. The default color is blue.
To color code branches under a power factor limit: Select Branches under power
factor limit. The default color is green.
4-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Voltage magnitude: Check the box next to voltage magnitude to display voltage at
each node on the diagram. If you do not select voltage magnitude, the voltage type,
nominal base voltage, and voltage angle will be disabled.
Voltage angle: Check the box to display voltage angle at each node on the diagram.
Confidential
4-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Branch Results:
Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at
each branch on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and
shunt display option is set to current.
Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each
branch on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current.
Results on: Select how you want branch results displayed on the diagram. Your
choices are: both ends, upstream side, downstream side.
Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each
branch on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display option is set to power.
Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive
power at each branch on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the
branch and shunt display option is set to power.
Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the
apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only
if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at
each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt
display option is set to S, pf.
Shunt Results:
4-10
Current magnitude: Check the box next to current magnitude to display the current at
each shunt on the diagram. Current magnitude may be selected only if the branch and
shunt display option is set to current.
Current angle: Check the box next to current angle to display the current angle at each
shunt on the diagram. Current angle may be selected only if the branch and shunt display options is set to current.
Real power: Check the box to the left of real power to display the real power at each
shunt on the diagram. Real power may be selected only if the branch and shunt display
option is set to power.
Reactive power: Check the box to the left of reactive power to display the reactive
power at each shunt on the diagram. Reactive power may be selected only if the branch
and shunt display option is set to power.
Apparent power: Check the box to the left of Apparent power, S(kVA) to display the
apparent power at each branch on the diagram. Apparent power may be selected only
if the branch and shunt display option is set to S, pf.
Power factor: Check the box to the left of Power factor, pf to display power factor at
each branch on the diagram. Power factor may be selected only if the branch and shunt
display option is set to S, pf.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Display: Select current, power, apparent power and power factor (S, pf) display from
the available list.
Unit prefix: Select none to display current in amps, real power in watts and reactive
power in var. Select k (kilo) to display current in kiloamp (kA) real power in kilowatts
(kW), and reactive power in kilovar (kvar). For power, an additional unit prefix M is provided for megawatt (MW) and megavar (Mvar).
The following branch and shunt display options are available when you select to display
power:
Total: Select this to show the total power over all phases.
Branch losses: Check the box to the left of branch losses to show total branch losses
instead of power.
Precision: Select the number of decimal places to display from the available list.
Show results for: Select to show results for Phase A only, Phase B only, Phase C only,
the maximum value over phases A, B and C, or the minimum value over phases A, B,
or C. This option may also be selected on the Zoom Toolbar.
Show units: Check the box to the left of show units to show the result units on the diagram. The result units are automatically displayed in the status bar and will be printed
on the hard copy output of the one-line diagram even if this option is not selected.
Maximum fault current: Select to display the maximum fault current over all phases,
then select the type of fault current to display from the available list. Fault types are
specified from Analysis Options Property sheet, Short Circuit tab (see Figure 4-15). If
maximum fault current is not checked, no fault current results will display on the
diagram.
Phase at which it occurred: If you wish to display the phase with the maximum fault
current, check the box to the left of this text.
Confidential
4-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Report Options
The report update feature allows the user to specify that certain report database files be updated
whenever an analysis function (loadflow, fault all, etc.) is run. This is useful when loading custom
reports created with Crystal Reports Designer or modified from one of the standard reports. This
step is transparent to the user when loading the standard reports. To enable report updating open
the Analysis Options dialog and click the Reports tab. Five different classes of reports may be
enabled by checking the appropriate check boxes: branch device reports, shunt device reports,
node reports, harmonics reports and the fault all report. Below each checkbox for the first four
classes is a group of radio buttons corresponding to the various standard reports associated with
that class of report. For each enabled report class PSS/ADEPT will update the database files associated with the standard report that is selected for that class.
4-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Enter/select the load flow options you want for your calculation:
Show detailed convergence information: Click the box to display detailed progress
messages in the Progress View during the analysis operation (Figure 4-10). For example, you may show a detailed convergence monitor, which flags equipment adjustments.
Persistent appearance of a given node may indicate an excessive load, excessive incoming line impedance, or other similar problem with that node. It can
also indicate an error in the input data not detected by the validation algorithms.
Stop Calculation After N Iterations: Enter the number of iterations (N) to perform
before pausing the solution.
When the solution is in a "paused" state, the Solution Paused dialog displays (Figure 411).
4-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
based on the switching increment, the regulated voltage range, and the regulated node
specified on the Capacitor Property sheet.
During the load flow, if the voltage at the regulated node is not within the specified voltage range, the switched capacitor fraction switched in, will be incremented by the
switching increment until the voltage at the regulated node falls within the voltage
range.
Graphical convergence monitor: Click the box that precedes the Graphical
Convergence Monitor option to view a graphical convergence monitor that shows you
graphically how the solution converges during a load flow analysis. An example of a
graphical convergence monitor is shown in Figure 4-12.
4-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The results of the load flow analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the
results display options you specified (see Section 4.3.3).
Confidential
4-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Connection points (nodes, also called buses) define where other components are connected in a network. Connection points may or may not correspond to a physical
device.
Shunt devices represent physical components that exist at one connection point.
Branch devices represent physical components that exist between two (or more) connection points.
Electric power systems are usually three-phase systems, and in PSS/ADEPT each three-phase
network component contains information for all three phases and can be manipulated as a single
entity. A node, for example, provides three connection points, one each for phases A, B, and C. Similarly, a branch provides up to three phases (for A, B, and/or C) between two nodes. The actual
number of conductors or phases present is an attribute of a branch. The three-phase branch is
therefore flexible enough to represent one, two, or three phases. Shunt devices, except for shunt
capacitors, are defined similarly to branches, having 3, 2, or 1 phase.
Sources
A network to be solved in PSS/ADEPT must have at least one three-phase balanced source. In
PSS/ADEPT, it is possible to have any number of sources in service at one time. A source is specified by its terminal voltage and positive- and zero-sequence impedance. When only the short circuit
fault MVA of the source is known, it must be converted to positive- and zero-sequence impedances.
Instructions to convert fault MVA to sequence impedances are located in Chapter 3, Section 3.7.6.
Lines and Cables
A line section connects between two nodes and contains at least one phase wire. A line can have
single-, two-, or three-phase wires.
Transposed lines are specified by their positive- and zero-sequence impedances, and by their
positive- and zero-sequence charging susceptance. Single- and two-phase lines are also specified
by positive- and zero-sequence impedances/admittance. A single-phase line has only one series
impedance and charging admittance. When entering a single-phase line, set positive- and zerosequence impedances/admittances equal to each other. The conductors in a two-phase line have
a self-impedance Zs and a mutual-impedance Zm. When entering data for the two-phase line put in
the positive- and zero-sequence impedances in just as you would for a three-phase line (i.e.,
Z1 = Zs Zm and Z0 = Zs + 2 Zm). The two-phase line also has two charging admittances, Bs for
each conductor to ground and Bm between the two conductors. Again, do the derivation as for a
three-phase line, B1 = Bs + 2 Bm, B0 = Bs. A simple way to enter the impedances/admittances is
to just use the values for the line with all three phases present; there will be very little error in how
many phases are specified.
Presently, cable data is entered the same as for overhead lines, by specifying positive- and zerosequence parameters. For a cable with a grounded shield, the positive- and zero-sequence
charging admittances are usually equal to each other.
4-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformers
PSS/ADEPT models a wide variety of transformer connections, including wye-wye, wye-delta,
delta-delta, voltage regulators, etc. For a listing of PSS/ADEPT transformers; refer to Appendix A,
Section A.1. Each transformer has positive- and zero-sequence impedance, the values of which
may be listed explicitly or in the Construction Dictionary. The zero-sequence impedance is used to
represent grounding impedances in wye-connected windings. If the transformer has no grounding
impedances, the zero-sequence impedance is normally set equal to the positive sequence value.
For a delta-delta transformer, or a wye-delta transformer with the wye winding solidly grounded, set
the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive sequence value; PSS/ADEPT will take care of
blocking zero-sequence current, shunting zero-sequence current to ground, etc.
Transformer connections that cannot be directly represented by one of the types shown in
Appendix A, Table A-1 can often be modeled by using combinations of the implicit models. For
example, a three-winding transformer can be modeled using three two-winding units. See
Appendix A for transformer models that are not directly represented by one of the PSS/ADEPT
transformer types.
Because PSS/ADEPT handles transformer types and connections differently from PSS/U,
there can be some changes when transformers are transferred back and forth between the
programs using raw data file (*.dat). For a complete description of transformer adjustments applied
when reading and writing PSS/U raw data files, see Appendix A, Sections A.1.3 and A.1.4. We
advise saving your data in the *.adp format for transformers and other new PSS/ADEPT data (snapshots, etc.).
Machine Modeling
Three-phase synchronous and asynchronous (induction) machines are modeled in PSS/ADEPT.
Both types can be designated either as a generator or motor by choosing the appropriate sign for
the total real power drawn, a negative value indicates a generator. Additional information on
machines in PSS/ADEPT is contained in Appendix A, Section A.3.
Synchronous Machines
In the power flow, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine model will attempt to hold its terminal
voltage constant at a user-specified value. The reactive power output or absorption will be adjusted
to control the terminal voltage. If the reactive requirements of the model exceed the defined reactive
capability limit, control of the terminal voltage will be lost, and the synchronous machine will essentially turn into a constant power load. The voltage setpoint and reactive limits of the machine are
specified in the Machine Property sheet (refer to Chapter 3, Sections 3.7.7 and 3.7.8).
If a synchronous machine is operated above its rated current or above its rated terminal voltage,
the rated temperature rise of the copper or iron would be exceeded respectively. These limits can
be graphically represented as illustrated in Figure 4-14 in terms of reactive power versus real
power. The circular arc from B to C, with its radius equal to the rated kVA of the machine and center
at the origin, represents the rated armature current limit at rated voltage. Point B represents the
rated power factor of the machine. The arc from A to B represents rated field current limit of the
machine. When a synchronous machine is operated in the underexcited region, there is a high magnitude of flux in the core ends of the machine. The arc from C to D represents the limit for heating
due to this flux.
Reactive capability curves as shown in Figure 4-14 can be used to determine the reactive limits of
a machine. The typical maximum and minimum reactive limits would correspond to points B and C,
respectively. Note, however, the reactive limits can change for different levels of real power.
Confidential
4-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When a synchronous machine is started, it is represented by its locked rotor impedance. If the synchronous machine is running, and another machine is being started, the running synchronous
machine will be represented by a source behind transient reactance. The value of the source
voltage/angle is determined by running a load flow of the network at the conditions existing just
before the motor starting breaker is closed.
In a short circuit simulation, a synchronous machine is a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, according to which you select. The value of the source is determined the
same way as was done for motor starting (i.e., running a prefault load flow).
Rated
Field
Current
Rated
Armature
Current
Reactive
Power (Q)
B
Rated pf
0
Real Power (P)
4-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Induction Machines
During a load flow simulation, induction machines normally draw the specified real power. The reactive power consumption and slip are determined from the machine model. There are five induction
machines available in PSS/ADEPT, corresponding to NEMA A, B, C, D, and E designs. However, if
the induction goes beyond its maximum torque capability, it will stall. When that happens the induction machine will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. When an induction machine is
started it will be represented by, its locked rotor impedance. If the induction machine is running, and
another machine is being started, the running induction machine will be represented by a source
behind transient reactance, the same as for the synchronous.
In a short circuit simulation, induction machines are a source behind either the transient or subtransient impedance, just as with the synchronous machine. For further information, see Appendix A,
Section A.3.
Static Load Modeling
In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For
grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas,
ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load
entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is
connected between phases C-A.
Constant Power Load
Common practice in load flow work assumes that distribution tap changing transformers, voltage
regulators, and capacitors hold system voltages to nominal values. This is also valid for industrial
loads that are predominately characterized by electrical motors consuming constant power. Hence,
it is appropriate for loads to be modeled as constant real and reactive power demand:
S n = P n + jQ n = cons tan t
With this type of load representation, the power demand does not vary with voltage. The load current, however, varies inversely proportional to the voltage level (V), as:
Sn *
I L = -------
V
where the asterisk indicates the complex conjugate.
To allow convergence at very low system voltages (i.e., 0.5 pu), as node voltage decreases constant
power loads are gradually converted to constant impedance.
In some cases, treating loads as constant power may not be acceptable. In these studies the
voltage dependence of load can be modeled by, constant current and/or constant impedance loads.
Confidential
4-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
S n *
I L = -------
V n
where Vn is the node base voltage.
With the constant current load representation, the actual power demand varies with node voltage
(V), as:
VS
*
S Actual = VI L = ----------nVn
Constant current loads are also gradually converted to constant impedance as the node voltage
decreases.
Constant Impedance Load
When representing load using the constant impedance model, the value of constant impedance is
determined from the nominal value of power demand that was entered into PSS/ADEPT as follows:
2
Vn
Z L = ----------- = cons tan t
S
n
where Vn is nominal one-per-unit voltage.
The actual power demand varies with the squared of the corresponding node voltage (V) as:
2
2
V Sn
V
S Actual = ------- = -------------ZL
2
Vn
4-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Impedance for phase-to-ground faults: You can enter a fault grounding impedance.
The default grounding impedance is zero representing a solidly grounded (bolted) fault.
This grounding impedance is only applicable to the "Phase-to-ground through impedance" fault type.
Fault All Types: Specify the type(s) of Fault All calculation(s) you want to perform on
the network. A Fault All will perform calculations for all fault types applied sequentially
and individually at each node in the power system network. This option is not used for
standard fault calculations.
4. Click the OK button to accept the short circuit analysis options.
Confidential
4-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The results of the short circuit analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-16)
according to the result display options you selected.
4-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Machine Modeling
In the short circuit calculations, synchronous machines are treated as constant voltage behind an
impedance. You may specify transient or subtransient machine impedance for the fault calculation:
choose Analysis>Options from the Main Menu, click the Short Circuit tab, and click the option
you want.
Running induction machines are represented the same as synchronous machines in the short circuit solutions; that is, they are treated as constant voltage behind an impedance. The impedance
used is either subtransient or transient, as specified by the user. The internal voltages for both synchronous and induction machines are determined form the prefault load flow, just as for sources.
Static Load Modeling
In PSS/ADEPT, static loads are modeled as constant power, constant current, or constant impedance. In addition, PSS/ADEPT allows you to specify the load as grounded or ungrounded. For
grounded load types, the load is represented as connected between phase and neutral, whereas,
ungrounded load entered in phase A is actually connected between phases A-B, ungrounded load
entered in phase B is connected between phases B-C, and ungrounded load entered in phase C is
connected between phases C-A.
PSS/ADEPT considers the load connection in the short circuit calculation. For example, if a transformer is delta-grounded wye through a resistance, Rg, and the load is grounded wye connected,
then for a single line-to-ground fault, the transformer neutral resistance, Rg, will be in parallel with
the load impedance in the zero sequence. This will produce more accurate results then the methodology used in PSS/U.
4-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
In a three-phase unbalanced network, Thevenin impedance is a complex matrix rather than a single
complex number. Similarly, the equivalent voltage is a complex vector rather than a single complex
number. These are shown below in phase (ABC) space.
Z aa Z ab Z ac
Z abc = Z ba Z bb Z bc
Z ca Z cb Z cc
Va
V abc = V b
Vc
In symmetrical component (012) space, the Thevenin impedance is also a complex matrix and the
equivalent voltage is a complex vector.
Z 00 Z 01 Z 02
Z 012 = Z 10 Z 11 Z 12
Z 20 Z 21 Z 22
V0
V 012 = V 1
V2
The cross terms (Z01, Z02, Z10, Z12, Z20, and Z21) are often insignificant and are usually ignored.
The ratio of reactance to resistance, called the X over R ratio, is an important quantity and the following can be obtained directly from the functions that calculate Thevenin equivalent impedance:
Im ( Z 00 ) Re ( Z 00 )
Im ( Z 11 ) Re ( Z 11 )
Im ( Z 22 ) Re ( Z 22 )
Confidential
4-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Determining short circuit current in this manner has the advantage of being fast. It is particularly fast
to calculate fault current for several different types of fault at one location. There is a small amount
of overhead in moving the fault to another location; the process is still relatively fast however. Note
that it is not possible to calculate current in the lines, transformers, switches, and other branches of
the network. It is only possible to get fault terminal current.
The only current available from these functions is the fault terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic). For faults of
type line-to-ground and faults of type line-to-line-to-ground, there is no ambiguity between current
in the fault and the fault terminal current. For faults of type line-to-line there may be ambiguity
between terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) and current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) as shown below (Figure 419). Terminal current (Ia, Ib, Ic) is available. Current in the fault (Iab, Ibc, Ica) is not available.
4-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Motor starting will appear disabled until a machine has been selected for starting.
The results of the motor start analysis will be displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-21)
according to the result display options you selected.
4-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The motor starting analysis performs a simultaneous motor start of all designated motors.
PSS/ADEPT automatically performs a prestart solution with the starting motors off-line (a load flow),
then runs a starting solution. A comparison between the prestart and starting conditions can be
obtained either on the diagram or by selecting a Voltage Drop report.
The event sequence for motor a starting study is as follows:
1. Specify the motors to start in the Motor Starting tab of the Analysis Options Property
sheet.
2. Select Analysis>Motor Starting from the Main Menu.
3. The designated motors to be started are disconnected from the network. A load flow is
performed to establish prestart conditions.
4. Simultaneous motor starting is carried out by switching all starting motors online. A load
flow is again performed to established starting conditions. All transformer taps are
locked during the starting calculation.
5. Compare
the
prestart
and
starting
Report>Node Voltage>Drop from the Main Menu.
conditions
by
choosing
6. Examine the network prestart and starting current and voltages on the Diagram View.
Voltage difference between prestart and starting conditions for nodes in the network
can be obtained by clicking the Results Tab in the Equipment List View and choosing
Voltage change from the Condition drop-down menu.
You can see this only after a motor start analysis, and you may have to scroll
down the Results tab, which is located on the Equipment List View.
Confidential
4-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The starting transformer impedance may be entered directly into the fields provided. The transformer impedance you specify is for a transformer tap of 0.65 pu.
The actual tap setting to be used for the motor starting is specified on the field provided
(Figure 4-22).
Figure 4-22. Machine Property Sheet Showing Series Starting Autotransformer Option
4-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-37
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The installation cost of switched capacitors, cQ, is like that for fixed capacitors, except that switched
capacitors will probably cost more, so they have a separate field.
The maintenance rate for fixed capacitors, mF, is the yearly cost of keeping them in service. The
rate is expressed per kvar-yr. Maintenance costs increase at the inflation rate.
The maintenance rate for switched capacitors, mS, is similar to that for fixed banks. A separate field
is provided for the switched units because maintenance costs are expected to be higher for them.
Ne =
1 + -i n
---------1+r
n=1
The present value of the energy savings is then:
Savings F = 8760 Ne ( xP c P + xQ cQ )
The present value of the cost of the capacitor is:
Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F )
If the savings is greater than the cost, CAPO considers placing the (n+1)th capacitor; if the savings
are less than the cost, CAPO discards the nth capacitor and stops.
4-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
is being done on a yearly basis, the duration is the fraction of the year during which the
snapshot applies. Normally, you probably have the sum of the duration of all the snapshots you are using in CAPO sum to 1.0; however, there is no requirement that this be
so. For example, if your utility is only open 10 months of the year, CAPO can still be
used. For more information on defining load snapshots, refer to Chapter 3,
Section 3.11.
Number of banks available: Specify the number of fixed and switched capacitor
banks you have available for placement (e.g., the number in the warehouse). Initially,
the number of fixed and switched capacitors available for placement will be equal to
zero. If there are no banks available and you run the CAPO analysis, the Progress View
will display the "No Capacitors are available for placement" message.
Three-phase bank size: Specify the total three-phase capacitor bank size in kvar for
both fixed and switched banks to place on the network. For example, if one 100-kvar
fixed capacitor bank is indicated for placement, the analysis will place as many 100kvar fixed banks as it finds necessary to reach the optimal condition. The same is true
for switched capacitor banks.
Eligible nodes: Indicate which nodes are eligible for both fixed and switched capacitors by checking the box that precedes the node name. Initially, all nodes in the system
will be available for placement of both fixed and switched capacitor banks. (A check
mark appears in all boxes.)
To mark or unmark multiple consecutive nodes: Click the first item in a range, press
and hold down the Shift key, click the last node in the range.
To mark or unmark multiple nonconsecutive nodes: Press and hold down the Ctrl
key, and click the box that precedes each node.
The present worth of the savings does not offset the present worth of the costs. With
multiple snapshots the savings are evaluated as in the simple example considered
above, except now a weighted sum over all the profiles is calculated.
There are no more fixed capacitors available to be placed (actually, this can be checked
before all the nodes are searched, but is listed here for completeness).
An upper voltage limit is violated in one of the profiles (the network upper voltage limit
is set from the Analysis Options Property sheet under the General tab).
Fixed capacitors continue to be placed until one of the above three conditions are encountered; at
that point the fixed capacitor placement ends and the switched placement begins. This procedure
4-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
is a bit more complicated, and before we begin this is probably a good point to make a comment. If
only one load snapshot is used, you might expect that after the fixed capacitors are placed there
will be no placement of switched capacitors. There are at least four conditions where this is not true:
You had only a few fixed capacitors available, and there was still considerable opportunity for savings when these fixed units were depleted.
The eligible nodes for switched capacitors are different than those eligible for fixed
capacitor placement.
You make the cost of switched capacitors less than that of fixed capacitors, and after
the fixed capacitors are placed it will still be cost effective to place switched capacitors.
You make the size of the switched capacitor bank smaller than that of the fixed bank.
The eligible nodes (for switched capacitors) in the network are reviewed to find the node, which produces the greatest savings summed over all the snapshots. There are a couple of subtleties in this
evaluation. First, if placing the switched capacitor causes a voltage violation in any snapshot, the
capacitor is turned off during that period. Second, if the capacitor causes a cost penalty for a snapshot, it is also turned off for that snapshot. The calculation of the present worth of the savings is then
calculated considering only the snapshots during which the capacitor is turned on. This process
continues until a point is reached where:
For reference, the complete set of CAPO equations are listed below. The cost of a capacitor, which
consists of installation cost and maintenance cost, is shown first for a fixed capacitor. The form is
the same for a switched capacitor.
Cost F = sF ( cF + Ne m F )
With multiple snapshots, three more variables must be defined. Let there be K total snapshots used
by CAPO, each of which has a duration dk. For any switched capacitor, let switchk be the switch
state, where switchk = 1 if the capacitor is on during the snapshot and = 0 if it is off. The savings for
a fixed capacitor (which is always switched on) is the sum of the savings over all snapshots.
K
K
Savings F = 8760 Ne cP xP k + cQ xQ k
k=1
k=1
The savings for a switched capacitor also involves the switching schedule.
K
K
k=1
k=1
Confidential
4-41
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Ne =
1 + -i n
---------1+r
n=1
In summary, CAPO places fixed capacitors on the network until one of the stop conditions are
encountered. Then switched capacitors are placed until one of the switched capacitor stop conditions occurs. The total cost of the optimization is then the installation and maintenance cost of all
the capacitors placed; the total savings is the sum of the savings from each capacitor.
CAPO may place multiple fixed and/or multiple switched capacitors at a node. PSS/ADEPT will
combine these capacitors into a single fixed capacitor and/or a single switched capacitor. The single
switched capacitor will have a switching increment assigned to it, and the switching schedule will
show the steps in service for the single capacitor.
4-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If you are not licensed to run the CAPO option, this button will not be available.
During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating the size and type of
the placed capacitor bank(s) and its node location along with the system losses. When the optimization is complete, the final system configuration including the newly added capacitors is redrawn
with the bank size and either the "FX" or "SW" indicating that a fixed or switched capacitor bank has
been added. A sample diagram and Progress View after placement is shown in Figure 4-24.
Figure 4-24. Diagram and Progress Views After Optimal Capacitor Placement
Confidential
4-43
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-45
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If you are not licensed to run the TOPO option, this button will not be available.
During the optimization, messages are written to the Progress View indicating which switches have
changed status and the system losses before and after the optimization. When the optimization is
complete, the final radial system configuration is displayed on the diagram (Figure 4-26) with
switches that have changed status during the analysis indicated with the text "Open" or "Closed".
4-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
4-47
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
( ln )
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
= min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
Va + Vb + Vc
= -----------------------------------------3
avg
V min ) ln V
*100.0
( %difference ) ln = ( V max
( ln )
( ln )
avg
V max
V min
ll V
( ll )
( ll )
Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
avg
4-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution)
V max
V min
ln V
( ln )
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln )
= min Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln )
Va + Vb
= ------------------------2
avg
V min ) ln V
*100.0
( %difference ) ln = ( V max
( ln )
( ln )
avg
( %difference ) ll = 0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) ln = 0
( %difference ) ll = 0
Percent Difference Between the Maximum and Average Phase Voltage
(NEMA No. MG 1, ANSI/IEEE C84.1) [default]
The equation used to calculate the percent difference between the maximum and average phase
voltage is given below:
Three Energized Phases
ln V
Va + Vb + Vc
= -----------------------------------------3
avg
V max
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
ln V
) ln V
*100.0
( %difference ) ln = ( V max
( ln )
avg
avg
ll V
Va Vb + Vb Vc + Vc Va
= --------------------------------------------------------------------------------3
avg
V max
( ll )
) ll V
( %difference ) ll = ( V max ll V
*100.0
( ll )
avg
avg
Confidential
4-49
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution)
ln V
Va + Vb
= ------------------------2
avg
V max
( ln )
= max Va ( ln ) , Vb ( ln ) , Vc ( ln )
ln V
) ln V
( %difference ) ln = ( V max
*100.0
( ln )
avg
avg
( %difference ) ll = 0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) ln = 0
( %difference ) ll = 0
Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Voltage
The equation used to calculate the ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence voltage is given
below:
Three Energized Phases
a =
V a + aV b + a Vc
V 1 = ------------------------------------------3
2
V a + a Vb + aV c
V 2 = ------------------------------------------3
V 2
Ratio ( % ) = 100 -------
V 1
Two Energized Phases
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
4-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4-51
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B&C, C&A by substitution)
I max = max Ia , Ib
Ia + Ib
I avg = --------------------2
( %difference ) = ( I max I avg ) I avg *100.0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) = 0
Percent Difference Between Phase and Average Phase Current
The equation used to determine the percent difference between phase and average phase current
is given below:
Three Energized Phases
Ia + Ib + Ic
I avg = ----------------------------------3
a = (I I
a
avg ) I avg *100.0
b = (I I
b
avg ) I avg *100.0
c = (I I
c
avg ) I avg *100.0
( %difference ) = max ( a, b, c )
Two Energized Phases (e.g., A & B, also valid for B & C, C & A by substitution)
Ia + Ib
I avg = --------------------2
( %difference ) = max ( I I
,
a
avg ) I avg *100.0 ( I b I avg ) I avg *100.0
One Energized Phase
( %difference ) = 0
4-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
I a + aI b + a I c
I 1 = -----------------------------------3
Ia + Ib + Ic
I 0 = -------------------------3
I 0
Ratio ( % ) = 100 ----
I 1
Two Energized Phases
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
Ratio of Negative-Sequence to Positive-Sequence Current
The equation used to determine ratio of negative-sequence to positive-sequence current is given
below:
Three Energized Phases
a =
I a + aI b + a I c
I 1 = -----------------------------------3
2
I a + a I b + aI c
I 2 = -----------------------------------3
I 2
Ratio ( % ) = 100 ----
I 1
Two Energized Phases
Ratio ( % ) = 0
One Energized Phase
Ratio ( % ) = 0
Confidential
4-53
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
P +Q
4-54
Confidential
Chapter 5
Results Reporting
5.1 Overview: Reporting Results
Solution results from any analysis may be displayed on the Diagram View, or in a tabular report.
Results on the diagram are fully customizable by setting diagram properties in combination with
clicking the Results tab located on the Equipment List View (see Chapter 1, Figure 1-5, and
Chapter 4, Section 4.3.3). In addition to viewing results on the diagram, results may also be printed
in tabular form by requesting a report. Several predefined tabular reports are available including
voltage, power, and current reports as well as device status reports, input data reports, and network
summaries. Customized reports can be designed if you purchase a copy of Crystal Reports 7.0 or
later. Using Crystal Reports with the reports database allows you to have limitless customizability
in report design. The report database tables supplied with PSS/ADEPT are outlined in Appendix G.
In this chapter you will learn about:
Confidential
5-1
Results Reporting
Selectable Tabular Reports
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
By phase.
By sequence.
Overloads.
Unbalance.
The branch current by phase report contains the branch current at each phase of the branch. The
branch current by sequence report contains the branch current in the positive, negative, and zero
sequence. The branch overload report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified rating
limit. The rating limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The
branch unbalance report contains a list of branches that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance
limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet.
By phase.
By sequence.
Over threshold.
Under threshold.
The node voltage by phase report contains node voltages at each phase. The node voltage by
sequence report contains node voltages in the positive, negative, and zero sequence. The node
voltage over threshold report displays nodes that are over the upper voltage threshold. The node
voltage under threshold report displays nodes that are under the lower voltage threshold. You can
specify the voltage thresholds under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The
5-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Selectable Tabular Reports
voltage drop report contains the prestart voltage, the starting voltage, and the voltage difference
between nodes in each phase. The voltage drop report is only available following a motor starting
analysis. The unbalance report contains a list of nodes that exceed a specified limit. The unbalance
limit is defined under the General tab of the Analysis Options Property sheet. The voltage profile is
a plot of voltage versus distance. You select a node in the network and a direct trace back to the
root node is performed. The root node is specified in Network Properties. Each node voltage is
plotted as a point on the graph. For reference, the upper and lower voltage thresholds are also
plotted (Figure 5-1).
By phase.
By sequence.
The shunt current by phase report contains shunt currents at each phase of the shunt item. The
shunt current by sequence report contains shunt currents in the positive, negative, and zero
sequence.
Confidential
5-3
Results Reporting
Selectable Tabular Reports
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer.
Synchronous machine.
Induction machine.
Switched capacitors.
The transformer status report contains transformer status and results including tap settings. The
synchronous machine status report contains synchronous machine status and results including
actual power drawn or supplied by the machine. The induction machine status report contains
induction machine status and results including total power and slip. The switched capacitor status
report contains switched capacitor status including the fraction switched in and the voltage at the
regulated node. Out-of-service shunt and branch device reports contain those devices, which are
currently out of service.
The converted MWh load report will display the real (kW) and reactive (kvar) values obtained from
the original MWh load data. If the original MWh load data is not concentrated, the calculated loads
are split between the FROM and TO nodes internally, and are not included in this report.
5-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Setting the Report File Location
Confidential
5-5
Results Reporting
Setting Report Units
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Identifier Tag: Enter a text identifier to appear at the top of the first page of the
report. This identifier tag will be automatically set to the company name you specified during the PSS/ADEPT installation.
Voltage Units:
5-6
Voltage: Select how you want the voltage to be displayed on the output reports;
kV, pu, or voltage on a nominal delivery voltage base.
Decimal precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for voltage. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Representation: Select the voltage output display as either line-to-line (LL) or lineto-neutral (LN).
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Setting Report Units
Power and Losses Units: Select how you want the power and losses to be displayed on the output reports.
Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for power and losses. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine
decimal places.
Representation: Select either rectangular (P, Q) or polar (S, kVA, pf, lead/lag) representation of power.
Angle:
Angle Units: Select how to display angles in the output reports; 0 to 360, 180 to
180, 0 to 2 , to raid.
Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for angle. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Current:
Current Units: Select how you want to display current in the output reports (amps,
kA).
Decimal Precision: Specify the number of significant digits to display following the
decimal for current. The reports are set up for a maximum of nine decimal places.
Thevenin Impedance:
Confidential
Units: Select how you want to display Thevenin impedance values following a
Fault All Analysis (Ohms or pu).
5-7
Results Reporting
Setting Report Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5-8
Node base voltage: Sort the nodes in ascending order of base voltage.
Tree: Sort the report based on the specified item ordering method.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Reporting on a Selection
Next Page
First Page
Last Page
Print
Zoom Level
Export
Confidential
5-9
Results Reporting
Exporting a Report to Another Format
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Disk file: creates a file in the format you specified in Step 1 on the hard disk.
Application: exports the report and automatically loads it into the application specified in Step 1.
Lotus Notes database: If you have Lotus Notes, you may export the report to a
Lotus Notes database file.
In some cases, exporting a report will not display certain fields correctly. For
example, exporting to Excel 8.0 (xls) may not display date information correctly.
This is due strictly to limitations of Crystal Reports. Try selecting another format, such
as Excel 8.0 (xls) (Extended) to see if the problem can be rectified.
5-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Results Reporting
Creating and Designing Reports Using Crystal Reports
Confidential
5-11
5-12
Confidential
Chapter 6
Line Properties Calculator
6.1 Overview: Line Properties Calculator
The Line Properties Calculator (LineProp) calculates line constants used in many power system
analysis problems. The constants include:
Average mutual impedances and admittances for each pair of circuits in the corridor.
The calculations performed by LineProp rely on tables of conductor characteristics. These tables
are described in Appendix H.
LineProp supports the following unit configurations:
60 Hz, English
60 Hz, SI (metric)
50 Hz, English
50 Hz, SI (metric)
English units use input in feet and output in feet. SI units use input in meters and output in meters.
In this manual you will learn how to:
Perform an analysis.
Confidential
6-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.1.1 Nomenclature
Throughout this manual the following nomenclature is used:
6-2
Corridor A set of parallel electrical Circuits, each with the (nearly) same geographic
beginning and end point. A Corridor generally has a width, which may be from 30 to
500 ft, and a length, which may be up to hundreds of miles.
Circuit A set of parallel Positions used to transmit electrical power. A Circuit is said
to have a certain number of phases; the vast majority of Circuits in actual use have
three phases, which are given the tag names of ABC, RYB, etc. The phase of a Position
is a tag designated by the electrical utility, and can be changed at any time. A Position
can only have one phase but multiple Positions in a circuit can have the same phase.
A set of Circuits, make up a Corridor. (Also referred to as a Line.)
Shield wire Another name for Grounded Position. A Position grounded often enough
so it can be assumed to be continuously grounded and have zero voltage on it. Also
called a ground wire or neutral wire. Shield wire Positions usually have only one Conductor, hence the name, shield wire. (Also referred to as neutral wire.)
Wire Another name for Conductor especially used when referring to Grounded
Positions.
Phase A tag applied to each bundle of a line used for the transmission of ac electrical
power. A line in a three-phase power system in the United States (and some other
countries) usually has the bundles labeled A, B, and C.
Conductor resistance The ac resistance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated temperature.
Conductor reactance The ac reactance per unit length of the Conductor at a designated frequency and spacing (usually a 1 foot spacing, but 1 meter is also possible).
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Circuit impedance A measure of the gradient of voltage versus current along the Circuit. Usually expressed in ohms () or /unit length. Impedance consists of a real part
called resistance (R) and an imaginary part call reactance (X).
Circuit admittance A measure of the gradient of current versus voltage along a Circuit. Usually expressed in Siemens (S) or S per unit length. An older name for
Siemens was mho. Admittance consists of a real part called conductance (G) and an
imaginary part called susceptance (B).
Sag For a Position or Conductor, the difference between the height at the structure
and the height at the lowest point, which would be at mid-span for a Conductor over
level ground.
Earth resistivity A specification of the bulk resistance properties of the earth, designated by the symbol , and always in units of m. Occasionally the inverse of
resistivity, called conductivity and designated by , may be encountered.
10 ft
sag = 9 ft
12 ft
2 ft
sag = 15 ft
2 ft
bundle separation = 18 in
4 ft
30 ft
50 ft
0 ft
75 ft
6-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To initiate the Line Properties Calculator choose Tools>Line Constants from the PSS/ADEPT
Main Menu. The Corridor View is displayed. Referring to Figure 6-2 notice:
the Title Bar, at the top of the view, is now PSS/ADEPT - [LineProp1],
the Corridor View is now where the Diagram View was, and
the LineProp Calculator has its own toolbar shown at the top of the Corridor View.
6-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. Click OK to accept the input. The Corridor View is now changed as illustrated in
Figure 6-4. Notice that there are two circles at position 0, one on top of the other. The
top circle represents a Position.
6-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6. Double-click anywhere inside the dashed box and the Current Circuit Properties sheet
is displayed. Figures 6-5 and 6-6 illustrate completed Current Circuit Properties sheets.
Confidential
6-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-8
When you change the Number of Positions, the appropriate number of Position
Details lines appear. The maximum number of positions is 10; the default number
is 1.
Choose the name of each position from the list of acceptable names; ground wires
are noted by a name with the first two characters of "Gr". The same position name
may be assigned to one or more positions within a circuit. All conductors in all positions with the same phase in a circuit are equivalenced to a single entry in the Z
impedance matrix and the Y admittance matrix for the circuit.
Specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) location and midspan sag for each of the
positions. X location is specified relative to the circuit origin. Y location is specified
as the height at the structure connection relative to the earth.
When you specify that the number of conductors per position (bundle) is greater
than one (max=8), the separation between adjacent position conductors (measured center to center) and the position of the first conductor relative to a zero horizontal position must be specified. Another term used to describe this separation is
"bundle spacing".
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Specify the position angle. The XY position of a bundle is its center point. A configuration occasionally seen on U.S. 345 kV lines is a vertical bundle of two conductors with 18 inch separation. This is specified as two conductors (in the bundle),
separation of 18 inches (also bundle diameter in this case) and 90 to the first conductor. A drawing of the bundle is shown in Figure 6-7.
Conductor
90 degrees
18 inches
x/y position of
center point
Confidential
6-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-10
You can sort the conductor data based on a combination of several sort criteria.
When the Clear Sort Fields button is clicked, the sort criteria are cleared.
To select a sort criteria highlight and click on the criterion, it is moved to the Sort
Fields criteria. The criteria are cumulative. In the example shown above, conductors are to be sorted by type and then by name.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To perform the sort, click the Do Sort button. For the example shown above the
conductors in the database are sorted by type and then by name.
Scroll through the conductor database. To select a conductor, click on the conductor name (the selected conductor is shown in the box in the lower right side of the
dialog) and select OK, or double-click on the conductor name to select it and return
to the Current Circuit Properties sheet.
The Fit All Columns button above the conductor table allows the user to view all
data for the conductors in one dialog, see Figure 6-8b.
9. When you click the OK button in the Current Circuit Properties sheet:
Checks are made on the circuit properties and appropriate messages displayed to
indicate improper locations (e.g., conductor separations that are not feasible,
phase positions that are not feasible, etc.).
Corrections must be made to the data before the program can proceed.
Once all infeasible data are corrected, program control is returned to the LineProp
Corridor View and the circuit is displayed as illustrated in Figure 6-9. Each position
in the circuit is shown and labeled.
Confidential
6-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The name of the Corridor File currently being viewed. The name is blank if the current
data have not been saved to a file.
The name of the circuit that is currently highlighted (the circuit surrounded by a dashed
box).
6-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6.2.4 Toolbar
The LineProp Toolbar (Figure 6-11) provides quick access to LineProp functions. The toolbar allows
you to quickly create, open, or save a corridor file; print the corridor file; add, copy, or delete circuits;
change the viewing area; change defaults; validate the circuit dimensions; and calculate impedances. The About LineProp button provides information on the LineProp version that is being used.
Create New Corridor File
Save Corridor File
Zoom In
Refresh Window
Zoom Window
About LineProp
Validate Circuits
Print Corridor
Open Corridor
select View>Zoom Rect from the Main Menu or select the Zoom Window button from
the toolbar,
position the mouse pointer in the drawing area near the area of interest,
hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse diagonally (you should see a rectangle around the objects of interest),
The Refresh Window and Zoom Extent options cause the Corridor View to return to a view of the
full corridor.
Confidential
6-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Units: This allows you to specify that all measurement units used in LineProp are to be
English or International System (SI). English units specify resistance and reactance in
ohms/mile, diameter in inches, conductor locations in feet, spacing in inches and output in
ohms/mile and s/mile.
SI units specify resistance and reactance in ohms/km, delimiter in mm, conductor locations
in m, spacing in cm and output in ohms/km and s/km.
Changing units while a circuit corridor is opened will not automatically convert specified
conductor positions. This must be done manually if you are not using a "Default" conductor
and ground wire.
Default Ground Conductor: This allows you to select the default ground conductor from
the conductor file and to modify the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The
operation to select a new default ground conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see Section 6.2.1, Step 8).
Default Conductor: This allows you to select the default phase conductor and to modify
the conductor reactance, resistance, and diameter. The operation to select a new default
conductor is the same as that used to select a specific conductor for a position (see
Section 6.2.1, Step 8).
General: This allows you to select the system frequency, the number of decimal places for
display, and the default conductor and corridor file names.
Confidential
6-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
For short transmission lines (less than about 50 miles), exact and approximate equivalent-circuit
parameters are very nearly equal and could be modeled satisfactorily by the equivalent circuit
shown in Figure 6-15. A long transmission line (greater than 50 miles) cannot be represented by an
equivalent circuit (shown in Figure 6-16) because of the behavior of Zex and Yex of a long line do
not correspond to constant values of Rs, Ls, and Cs.
LR
LL
LC
s
----------2
LC
s
----------2
L mi
Y
ex
---------2
ex
Y
ex
---------2
Z ex = R ex + jL ex
Y ex = jC ex
6-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The parameters Rex, Lex, and Cex are not constants; they vary significantly as frequency is varied
with the variation becoming stronger as line length is increased. Figure 6-17 considers a 400 mile
length; it shows the exact pi-equivalent parameters for frequencies of 60 and 65 Hz.
R = 10.59
L = 0.5276 H
C = 8.542 F
C = 8.542 F
Pi-Equivalent at 60 Hz
R = 10.08
L = 0.5168 H
C = 8.634 F
C = 8.634 F
Pi-Equivalent at 65 Hz
Confidential
6-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Figure 6-18 shows the percentage difference between the 60 and 65 Hz values of Rex, Lex, and
Cex of the line as its length is increased through the practical range. Apparently, the use of constant
effective resistance, inductance, and capacitance values in the pi-equivalent circuit is reasonable
for line sections up to about 100 miles long, but longer lines are not properly represented by an
equivalent with constant resistance, inductance and capacitance.
Difference,%
Length
(mi)
10
50
0.07
0.02
100
0.25
0.14
0.06
200
1.02
0.52
0.25
300
2.42
1.14
0.58
400
4.67
2.09
1.07
500
8.23
2.55
1.75
10
8
,%
6
4
0
100
200
300
400
Length, miles
500
Figure 6-18. Difference Between 60 and 65 Hz Values of Rex, Lex, and Cex
as a Function of Line Length
For long transmission lines, it is recommended that you use the line length option by checking the
Use Length box. Enter the line length in the box provided and select whether or not you want a
hyperbolic correction to be applied. If the hyperbolic box is checked a correction factor will be
applied to the impedance as described in Figure 6-18.
6-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. When you click the Print button, the Print dialog is displayed (Figure 6-22).
4. In the Print dialog you can specify where the printed output is to go, the number of
pages to print, and the number of copies to print.
5. Click OK to print the corridor diagram.
6-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Paste the circuit at a new location as instructed in the next section of this manual.
6-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. You are asked to verify that the circuit is to be deleted, as illustrated in Figure 6-26.
"New Circuit" is the name of the designated circuit to delete.
Confidential
6-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-28
Two or more bundles are not touching at their effective height. The bundle effective
height is the height at the structure minus 2/3 of the sag.
Two or more conductors within a bundle are not touching each other.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The results shown in this section are for a two circuit corridor. The circuit data are shown in
Figures 6-29a and 6-29b.
6-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Zero- and Positive-Sequence Impedances for Each Circuit (Z0-Z1 (Per Circuit)
Tab). In Figure 6-30, each circuit in the corridor is listed along with the calculated
positive- and zero-sequence resistance and reactance in ohm per circuit length. If
English units are being used, then the reported units are ohm per mile. Note that transposition is assumed.
The Save Results button allows you to save the results in a spreadsheet format (see
Section 6.3.3.5). A click the Cancel button returns you to the LineProp View.
6-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Zero- and Positive-Sequence Admittances for Each Circuit (Y0-Y1 (Per Circuit)
Tab). The positive- and zero-sequence admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit
length. For the case illustrated in Figure 6-31, the admittances are in micro-Siemens
per mile.
Confidential
6-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Self and Mutual Impedances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Z (Per Circuit) Tab). The
self and mutual impedances are ohm per unit length. In the case shown in Figure 6-32,
the impedances are ohm per mile.
6-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Self and Mutual Admittances for Each Circuit (Self-Mutual Y (Per Circuit) Tab). The
self and mutual admittances are in micro-Siemens per unit length. In Figure 6-33, these
are micro-Siemens per mile.
Confidential
6-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Average Mutual Impedance and Admittance for Each Circuit (Zm-Ym Avg (Per Circuit) Tab). The report shown in Figure 6-34, requires two or more circuits on the
corridor. This report shows the calculated average mutual impedance and admittance
between two circuits. The average mutual impedance (ZmAvg-R and ZmAvg-X) is
reported in ohm per circuit length (miles for the sample case); the average mutual
admittance (YmAvg-G and YmAvg-B) is reported in micro-Siemens per circuit length
(miles for the sample case).
6-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Impedance for the Corridor (Z (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the impedance
matrix for the corridor. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to
the circuit phases. Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0.A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0.B,
etc. The off-diagonal terms are for the coupling of the phases.
All values are expressed in ohm per circuit length. In the sample case (Figure 6-35),
this is ohm per mile.
Confidential
6-37
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Admittance for the Corridor (Y (Corridor) Tab). This report shows the admittance
matrix. The numbers listed across the top of the report correspond to the circuit phase.
Thus, 1 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase A, 2 corresponds to Circuit_0, Phase B, etc.
All values are given in micro-Siemens per corridor length. In the sample case (Figure 636), all values are given in micro-Siemens per mile.
6-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
6-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6-40
Confidential
Chapter 7
Protection and Coordination
7.1 Overview: Protection and Coordination
The protection and coordination module uses protective devices in conjunction with analysis activities to perform a coordination study on a given network. The protective devices guard the network
from threat of damage caused by overcurrents and transient overvoltages that can result in equipment loss and system failure. These protective devices are specified by adding protection
equipment packs to the network.
The protection and coordination module displays the characteristic curves of selected overcurrent
relays and fuses along with operating times of these protective devices for use in a coordination
study. A library of protective devices is provided in an Microsoft Access database and can be
modified at any time by using the tools provided by Microsoft Access. It is recommended that you
close all applications using Protection and Coordination. This ensures that your changes to the
database are seen in the application. You may view the operating times of the selected devices
based on a user-entered current, or you may use the current obtained from any analysis.
The protection and coordination module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access
the protection and coordination module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for the protection and coordination module, please contact PTI for further
assistance.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Confidential
7-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the branch where the protection equipment pack will
be connected. Click on the branch and the protection equipment pack will appear on
top of the selected branch (Figure 7-1).
You must click no more than 25% of the line length away from the node where
the protection equipment pack will be placed.
You cannot place more than two protection equipment packs on a branch
7-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Plot color: You may change the plot color of the selected device by clicking the
Browse
button. When a row is selected, the plot color for the device in that row is
shown.
Groups...: To add the selected protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click
Groups... button and click the box that proceeds the group name you want. Click the
OK button to accept the assignment. The group button is visible only if there are groups
defined in the network model.
Add Default: You can choose to make the default protection equipment pack the existing one by selecting the Add Default button. This will update your protection equipment pack to contain those devices you have previously defined in the default
Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet. For more information on default items see
Chapter 1, Section 1.7. This button is visible only if a default protection equipment pack
is defined.
Plot...: You may view the characteristic curves of all the selected devices in the protection equipment pack by selecting the Plot button. This plot will not produce any operating times. To display operating times you must run a coordination study (see
Section 7.4). To adjust the display, you can alter the plot options by clicking on the
Options tab (see Step 6). For information on the operations you can perform while in
this view, refer to Section 7.4.2.
When viewing the device curves in a protection equipment pack does not contain operating times (Figure 7-3).
Print Setup
Print
Refresh
7-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Selected Devices: The contents of the protection equipment pack will be displayed in
the selected device list. Devices are added to this list by selecting a protective device
from the list of available devices. You may select to populate this list with the default
protection equipment pack by clicking the Add Default button.
To add a device to the selected list: Select the device from the available list in
the available devices section. Click on the first column and, while holding down the
left mouse button, drag the selection over the selected device list and release the
mouse button, or, select the first column and click the Add button. If you doubleclick on column one of any row in the available list, you will get more information
for the device. Use this if you want to narrow down your choices.
To edit a device in the selected list: Double-click on the manufacturer field of the
device you want to modify, or, select the device in the list by clicking on the manufacturer field then clicking the Edit button. The property sheet for the selected
device will display.
To delete a device from the selected list: Select the device to delete by clicking
on the manufacturer field of the device you want to delete then click the Delete button, or, select the device to delete, and, while holding down the left mouse button,
drag the device outside of the selected device list area.
Available Devices: The available device list contains the contents of the coordination
database. The list of available devices is populated when you select to edit a protection
equipment pack.
For fuses, relays, and reclosers:
You can sort the database fields based on a combination of several sort criteria.
When the Clear button is clicked, the Sort Fields criteria will be cleared. Use the
Select Sort Fields list to select the sorting criteria. When the Do Sort button is
clicked, the fields in the database will be sorted by your selected criteria and displayed in the available device list. The default, sort criteria, is to sort the database
by manufacturer, followed by model, followed by rating. If you change the sort fields
and click OK on the Select Protection Equipment dialog, your sort order is saved.
The contents of the device database can be modified by using Microsoft Access.
You cannot add or remove devices from the database by using the protection
equipment pack property sheet. For more information, refer to Section 7.5.
For transformers, conductors, and machines, select the oppropriate tab and enter the
required parameters.
3. To display the protection equipment pack on the diagram, click once in the Visible
check box to place a check mark there.
4. To add a protection equipment pack to an existing group(s), click the Groups button
and click the box that precedes the group name you want. Click the OK button to accept
the assignment. If no groups have been specified, the Groups button will not be visible.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes to the protection equipment pack.
7-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
6. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plotting options for viewing the device
curves (Figure 7-4).
Confidential
Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Maximum current (A): Specifies the maximum value of the x-axis (current). You
may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 100000.
Minimum Current (A): Specifies the minimum value of the x-axis (current). You
may select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1.0.
7-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Y-Axis (Time):
Show major grid lines: When checked, shows the major axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Show minor grid lines: When checked, shows the minor axis grid lines in log-log
format.
Maximum time (sec): Specifies the maximum value of the y-axis (time). You may
select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1000.
Minimum time (sec): Specifies the minimum value of the y-axis (time). You may
select a value from the supplied list containing values in the range 0.01 to
10000000. The default value is 1.0.
Display:
Show curve hatching: When checked, curves will be shaded (hatched) between
the minimum and the maximum. For example, for a fuse the application will hatch
between the minimum melt and total clearing curves.
Show text annotation for plots: When checked, text annotation for each device
curve will be displayed directly on the plot.
Text annotation uses text color: When checked, the text annotation color will be
set to the color specified as the "Text color" in the Colors option.
Use only solid lines for plots: When checked, no patterned lines will be drawn
(i.e., dot-dash, dashed, etc.). All curves will be represented as solid lines.
Plot annotation text size: Specifies the font size for text annotation on the coordination plot.
Axis text size: Specifies the font size of the axis labels on the coordination plot.
Misc.:
Auto-scale axes: When checked, parameters specified for maximum current and
time, and minimum current and time are ignored and the axes will be automatically
scaled.
Axis label format: Select how you want the axes labeled, Decimal or Scientific.
Light table mode: When checked, you may enter a specific fault current to use to
determine the operating time of the protective devices. When this option is
selected, the program will not use any previously calculated current values.
Line Widths:
7-8
Current: Specifies line thickness for the current intersection point on each device
curve.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Colors:
Background: Specify the background color for the plot window (default = white).
Text: Specify the color of the text values in the plot window (default = black).
Axis: Specify the color of the x- and y-axis in the plot window (default = blue).
button.
Current Multiple: The current multiple will offset the values of current by a specified
factor. The default is 1.0.
Time Multiple: The time multiple will offset the values of time by a specified factor. The
default is 1.0.
Time Adder: The time adder will add the specified value to the time specified in the
manufacturer curve. The default is 0.0.
Confidential
7-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. To view more information for a device, click the More Info tab (Figure 7-6).
7-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse.
4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected
fuse.
7-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. Enter the name
of this device in the space provided.
Branch: Name of the branch where this relay is located.
Phasing: The phasing value indicates what phase is used to calculate device operating times. The available choices are: A, B, C, Positive Sequence (Pos-Seq), Negative
Sequence (Neg-Seq), Zero Sequence (Zero-Seq), Maximum over all Phases (MaxPhase), Maximum over all Sequences (Max-Seq), Neutral-to-Ground (Neutral).
Description: Enter a description for this relay device.
Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the relay.
Primary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) primary (line side) current in
amps.
Secondary CT Setting: Specify the current transformer (CT) secondary (relay side)
current in amps.
Time Dial setting: The time dial setting of this relay. You may enter the time dial setting
by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from left to right
until the proper time dial setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a time
dial setting outside the range indicated by the manufacturer. The Interpolate check box,
when checked, indicates that the curve displayed on the coordination plot is derived by
interpolation between two time dial settings in the database. This option allows for time
dial settings to be specified that are between time-dials located in the database. For
example, if time dial settings in the database are 1 and 2, the interpolate option will
allow a time dial of 1.5. PSS/ADEPT will interpolate between the curves for a time dial
setting of 1 and a time dial setting of 2.
Pick Up (Tap) setting: The pick up (tap) setting of this relay. You may enter the pick
up setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding the dial from
left to right until the proper pick up setting is displayed. You will not be allowed to specify a pick up setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer. Pick up setting is
equivalent to tap setting.
Instantaneous setting: The instantaneous setting of the relay. You may enter the
instantaneous setting by directly specifying the value in the box provided, or by sliding
the dial from left to right until the proper instantaneous setting is displayed. You will not
be allowed to specify an instantaneous setting outside the range specified by the manufacturer.
Instantaneous operation time: Used to specify the time delay for the instantaneous
operating time of the relay. If the database contains several different instantaneous
ranges, select the desired range from the list box provided.
Multiple of PU: When checked, instantaneous setting is specified as a multiple of
pickup (Tap).
Disable: When checked, disables the instantaneous functions of the relay.
3. Click the Plot Options tab and enter/select the plot options for this fuse.
4. Click the More Info tab to view additional data values associated with the selected fuse.
Confidential
7-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Single-phase
Three-phase
5-500
15-500
II
502-1667
501-5000
III
1668-10000
5001-30000
IV
Above 10000
Above 30000
For Category I transformers, the transformer damage curve is represented by a two-point curve represented by calculation points 1 and 4. For Category II, III, and IV transformers, the transformer
damage curve is represented by a four-point curve represented by calculation points 1, 2, 3, and 4.
For Category III and IV transformers, the source impedance is also used in calculating damage
curve points. The curve points are determined from the information contained in Table 7-2.
7-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Category
Time (sec)
Current (Amps)
T = 1250 (Zt)2
I = AF * Rated Current / Zt
II
T=2
I = AF * Rated Current / Zt
III, IV
T=2
II
T = 4.08
III, IV
T = 8.00
II
T = 2551 (Zt)2
III, IV
3
4
I, II, III, IV
I = AF * 5 * Rated Current
where:
Zt = Transformer impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base.
Zs = Source (system) impedance in per-unit on transformer kVA base.
AF = ANSI Factor (default = 1.0). See Table 7-3.
Table 7-3. ANSI Factors
Transformer
Connection
Fault Type
Three-Phase
Phase-Phase
Line-to-Ground
ANSI
Factor
Delta-Delta
1.0
0.87
N/A
0.87
Delta-Wye-Grounded
1.0
1.15
0.58
0.58
Delta-Wye
1.0
1.15
N/A
1.0
Wye-Wye
1.0
1.0
N/A
1.0
Wye-Delta
1.0
1.0
N/A
1.0
Confidential
7-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
* Conrad R. St. Pierre and Tracey E. Wolny, "Standardization of Benchmarks for Protection Device Time-Current Curves,"
IEEE Transactions on Industry Applications, Vol. IA-22, No. 4, pp. 623-632, July/August 1986.
7-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the transformer.
3. To add the transformer damage curve to the protection equipment pack, click the Add
button. The transformer damage curve will be displayed in the selected device list.
To edit an existing transformer damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the
transformer in the selected devices list, or select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify
the properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
7-18
Insulation Type
ACAR
None
340
Copper
None
340
Aluminum
None
340
ACSR (single-strand)
None
340
ACSR (multiple-strand)
None
645
Any
BUTYL
200
Any
CAMBRIC
200
Any
CP
250
Any
EPR
250
Any
ETFE
250
Any
FXLPE
250
Any
HDPE
180
Any
HMWPE
150
Any
LDPE
150
Any
OBR
200
Any
PAPER
200
Any
PPP
200
Any
PVC
150
Any
SBR
200
Any
SR
250
Any
XLPE
250
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Equations for calculating the conductor damage curve points in PSS/ADEPT are:
For Copper:
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 234 ) ( T 1 + 234 ) ) ) t ] )
For Aluminum:
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
For ACAR:
I = 0.093 A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
For ACSR (single and multiple):
I = A ( [ ( 0.0125LOG 10 ( ( T 2 + 228 ) ( T 1 + 228 ) ) ) t ] )
where:
I
Current in Amperes
Time (fixed at the following intervals {t = 1000, 100, 10, 1, 0.5, 0.1, 0.05, 0.01})
T1 =
T2 =
The actual values used for initial conductor temperature and maximum conductor temperature may
be re-specified by entering the value directly on the conductor damage curve property sheet.
Confidential
7-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
ACSR (single-strand) and ACSR (multiple-strand) is the recommended maximum temperature used to calculate the damage curve. ACSR single stranded conductors are
those conductors that have only an aluminum stranding (i.e., 1 AWG (Robin), 1/0 AWG
(Raven), 2/0 AWG (Quail)). The recommended maximum temperature for single strand
ACSR conductors is 340 C. ACSR multiple stranded conductors are those conductors
that have both aluminum and steel stranding (i.e., Drake (26/7)). The recommended
maximum temperature for multiple stranded ACSR conductors is 640 C.
Insulation Type: Select the insulation type from the available list. If the conductor has
no insulation, select (Bare).
Max temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired maximum temperature of the conductor
to consider. This value will default to the recommended maximum temperature determined from your selection of conductor material and insulation type.
Initial temperature (deg. C): Enter the desired initial temperature of the conductor to
consider. This value will default to the recommended initial temperature.
Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the fuse.
3. Click the Add button to add the conductor damage curve to the protection equipment
pack.
To edit an existing conductor damage curve, double-click on the device ID associated with the conductor in the selected devices list, or, select the device ID and click the Edit button. Modify the
properties you desire and click the OK button when finished.
Confidential
7-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Trip Coil (cont. Amps): Select the trip-coil rating in continuous Amps of the recloser
with hydraulic control. This field will be not be available if the recloser has electronic
control.
Min trip (A): Select the minimum trip rating in Amps of the recloser with electronic control. This field will not be available if the recloser has hydraulic control, however, it will
be automatically set to two times the trip-coil rating.
Time-current curve: Select the time-current curve to plot from the available list of
recloser curves.
Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Locked rotor (amps): The value of locked rotor amps will be calculated as six times
the full load (amps). To specify the value of locked rotor amps, check the box labeled
user-defined. The field will be enabled allowing the entry of a value of full load amps.
Acceleration time (sec): Enter the value to use for the motor acceleration time. The
motor acceleration time is the amount of time required for a motor to achieve rated revolutions per minute after the rated voltage has been applied to the motor terminals.
Machine starting characteristics: Select the machine-starting characteristic desired:
full voltage or autotransformer. The machine-starting curve will be adjusted based on
the option specified. If the machine is to be started through an autotransformer to
reduce inrush, specify the tap setting of the autotransformer. The motor-starting curve
will then be determined by adjusting the curve based on the tap setting of the transformer where 1.0 is 100%.
Visible: Indicate whether the curve should be visible on the coordination plot.
Disabled: Check the box to disable the calculation of operating time for the recloser.
7-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The system one-line diagram containing protection equipment packs. You can add protection equipment packs to the network in the Diagram View by selecting the
Protection Equipment button (see Section 7.2).
An analysis solution to indicate the values of current that are expected to flow through
each protective device. Values of current may be from a power flow, short circuit, or
motor starting analysis. Current may be specified directly by selecting the Light table
mode option located on the P&C Options tab of the Protection Equipment Pack Property sheet.
A selected area on the one-line diagram indicating the area to study during the coordination analysis. You can select an area on the one-line diagram by using the selection
tools provided with the application.
After you have selected an area to study, choose Analysis>Coordination. The Protection and
Coordination View will display.
Confidential
7-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Located on the lower left side of the plot area are the X and Y coordinates of your mouse pointer.
You may use this mouse pointer to locate a current/time point in the plot by moving your mouse over
the curve area. Modification of the axis title, can be accomplished by double-clicking on the text and
altering the desired property values.
List View
Text Annotation
7-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
(Primary Key)
MANUFACTURER
Text
Manufacturer name.
NOMINAL_RATING
Text
CONTINOUS_LOADABILITY
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_05
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_1
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_2
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_4
Text
DAILY_LOADABILITY_8
Text
EMERG_05
Text
EMERG_1
Text
EMERG_2
Text
EMERG_4
Text
EMERG_8
Text
7-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
DevId
MODEL
Type
Description
Text
Text
Model number
SPEED_CHARACTERISTIC
Text
NOMINAL
Text
MAX
Text
CURVE_CODE
Text
SYM_AMPERES
Text
ASYM_AMPERES
Text
FUSE_UNIT_CATALOG_NUM
Text
MOUNTING_CATALOG_NUM
Text
DevIndex
Number (Auto)
Confidential
7-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
CurveType
Text
Curve Type:
MM = minimum melt curve
MC = total clearing curve
Time
Number
Current
Number
7-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
Text (Primary
Key)
DEVICE_NUM
Text
RELAY_CATEGORY_NAME
Text
Text
Manufacturer name
(e.g., GE,WE,ASEA).
TYPE
Text
MODEL
Text
TIME_CHARAC_1
Text
MANUFACTURER
TAP_UNITS
Number
TIMEDIAL_FORMAT
Number
Enter a 1 to look up max and min timedial and step using time-dial step enter a
0 to read the RelayCurve table for Devid
and Time-Dial.
MIN_TIMEDIAL_SETTING
Number
MAX_TIMEDIAL_SETTING
Number
TIMEDIAL_STEP
Number
CURVE_NUMBER
Text
ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Text
If the same relay is used for multiple purposes, use this field to uniquely identify
the relay.
RATED_CURRENT
Number
PICKUP_FACTOR
Number
Confidential
7-35
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
(Primary
Key)
DevIndex
Number
(Auto)
Text
Text
MIN_TAP_SETTING
Text
MAX_TAP_SETTING
Text
TAP_STEP
Text
INST_RANGE
Text
TAP_RANGE_ID
AVAILABLE_TAP_SETTINGS
7-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
INST_STEP
Number
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_CODE
Text
SUPERVISING_ELEMENT_DESIGNATION
Text
STYLE
Text
Required
Type
Description
DevId
Text
Device identifier. Must match the
(Primary Key) DevId specified in the Relay table.
Time-Dial
Number
Time
Number
Current
Number
Confidential
7-37
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Required
Type
Description
DEVID
Text
MANID
Text
REC_TYPE
Text
NOM_VOLT
Text
CON_TYPE
Text
INTERUP_MED
Text
BIL
Number
MAX_CUR_RATING
Number
CATALOG_NUM
Text
Catalog number.
ELEC_CONTROL_NUM
Text
7-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.3.2 RecloserRatings
The RecloserRatings table contains coil sizes and minimum trip ratings along with interrupting ratings for each recloser type that is specified in the RecloserMfrSpecs table. The RecloserRatings
table also defines a pointer to the recloser time-current curve along with a current offset if necessary. The current offset (X_OFFSET) is used to shift the recloser curve to the correct minimum trip
value. This allows you to specify one "base" curve in the database that indicates the manufacturers
minimum trip coil/minimum trip rating and adjust for other trip coil/minimum trip ratings by specifying
an offset multiplier (X_OFFSET) to the "base" curve. The "base" curve would be represented by the
field CURVE_PTR which indicates which recloser curve to extract from the database. If no shift is
required, specify an X_OFFSET of 1.0. For reclosers that cannot be represented by a "base" curve
specify a unique curve pointer (CURVE_PTR) and an X_OFFSET of 1.0.
The format of the RecloserRatings table is given below (Table 7-12):
Table 7-12. RecloserRatings Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
DEVID
Text
TRIP_COIL_RATING
Text
MIN_TRIP_RATING
Text
OPER_VOLTAGE_INDEX
Text
Text
INTERRUPT_RATING
CURVE_PTR
Text
X_OFFSET
Number
Confidential
7-39
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7.5.3.3 RecloserTCCCurve
The RecloserTCCCurve table contains the recloser time-current curves. Time-current curves are
entered into the database with current specified in Amps and time specified in seconds. Each curve
is defined by a curve pointer (specified in the RecloserRatings table) and a curve type (A, E, 101,
102, etc.). The curve type is indicated on the time-current curve by the manufacturer of the recloser.
The format of the RecloserTCCCurve table is given below (Table 7-13).
Table 7-13. RecloserTCCCurve Table
Field Name
Required
Type
Description
CURVE_PTR
Text
CURVE_SET_TYPE
Text
Number
Number
7-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-41
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-43
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
5. Under the RecloserCurve area, type the curve pointer defined in Step 3 and the associated current and time points that identify the time-current curve for this recloser. The
curve identifier (Curve ID) is normally the number or letter of the TCC curve supplied
by the manufacturer.
6. Select Close to exit the form and add the recloser record into the database.
Confidential
7-45
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-47
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-49
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To delete a fuse:
1. Click the Database Maintenance button.
2. Click the Delete Relay Records button. The Delete Relay Records form is displayed
(Figure 7-27).
7-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To delete a recloser:
1. Click the Database Maintenance button on the Main Switchboard.
2. Click the Delete Recloser Records button. The Delete Recloser Records form is displayed (Figure 7-28)
Confidential
7-51
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
7-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
7-53
7-54
Confidential
Chapter 8
Harmonic Analysis
8.1 Overview: Harmonic Analysis
A harmonic analysis can be used model power system distortion. The deviation between the perfect
sinusoid is expressed in terms of harmonic components. PSS/ADEPT can perform harmonic analysis on your network and display graphical results. After the network is solved at the fundamental
frequency (e.g., 50 Hz, 60 Hz), all of the network components are converted into impedances.
These impedances are varied according to the harmonic number and the network is solved for each
specific harmonic (e.g., 1st, 3rd, 5th). For each device type within the network there are various
ways of modeling the effect of the harmonic number on the device impedance.
A current injection technique is used to inject current of a certain magnitude and angle into the network. Harmonic filters may also be defined directly in the network by specifying a shunt device of
this type at any node in the network.
Harmonic analysis can be used to calculate the total harmonic distortion, telephone influence factor,
and Thevenin impedance. In addition, a harmonic scan is also possible over a range of harmonic
numbers.
The harmonics module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will be unable to access the harmonics
module if you have not purchased the license. If you wish to purchase a license for this module,
please contact PTI for further assistance.
In this chapter, you will learn about:
Confidential
8-1
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Injections
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-2
You can specify a harmonic injection only at the FROM side of a transformer branch.
Nodes that are connected by a zero impedance line branch will be handled as one
node, not two.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Injections
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the connection line of the shunt item, click just over
half the distance toward the shunt item symbol. The harmonic injection symbol
(Figure 8-1) will appear on top of the connection line between the node and the shunt
item symbol.
Confidential
8-3
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Injections
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
button.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the sending end of the branch and click within a quarter
of the total length of the transformer from the node. A harmonic injection symbol will
appear on the selected transformer branch (Figure 8-2).
8-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Injections
button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic injection will be connected.
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic injection symbol
(Figure 8-3) to the desired position.
Confidential
8-5
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Injections
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Adding Harmonic Filters
2. Enter/select the properties for the harmonic injection. Press the Tab key to move to the
next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information as needed.
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter
an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain
embedded blanks.
Harmonic Injection List: Adding an item to the list specifies a new harmonic injection.
To add an item to the list, click the New
button and specify the requested data. To
remove an item from the list, click the Delete
button. To edit an existing item in the
list, double-click on the desired item in the list.
For each harmonic injection enter the following parameters:
Harmonic number: Specify the harmonic number where this current injection will be
used (e.g., 1, 5, 7, 9, etc.). Normally the harmonic number is specified as an integer
value, however, real numbers are allowed.
Current magnitude: Specify the current magnitude in per-unit of base current.
Current angle: Specify the current angle in fundamental degrees.
If you specify a harmonic injection at a node, the base current for the injection
must be specified in amps. If you specify a harmonic injection at a transformer or
shunt item, the branch or shunt current is used as the base value and the base current
field will not appear on the property sheet.
3. To display the harmonic injection on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box
to place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected harmonic injection is in service, click the In service check
box. This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic injection is out
of service.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
button.
2. Position the pointer over the node to which the harmonic filter will be connected.
3. Click and hold down the mouse button while dragging the harmonic filter symbol to the
desired position.
Confidential
8-7
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Filters
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Editing Harmonic Filters
2. On the Main tab, enter/select the properties for the harmonic filter. Press the Tab key
to move to the next field or click in the field of interest, then add or change information
as needed.
Name: Each item in the network must have a unique name identifier. You may enter
an alphanumeric character name up to 12 characters. The name cannot contain
embedded blanks.
Type: You may choose several filter types from the available list containing high pass,
high pass 1st order, high pass 2nd order, high pass C type, and single tuned. Once you
have selected a filter, an illustration of the filters configuration displayed.
Rating: Specify the filter rating in kVA.
Resistance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter resistance in per unit on the filter base
rating.
Reactance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter reactance in per unit on the filter base
rating.
Inductance (pu on filter base): Specify the filter inductance in per unit on the filter
base rating.
For resistance, reactance, and inductance you can refer to the diagram for the filter type to identify which values correspond to the filter component.
Connection: Specify whether this filter is wye (grounded) or delta (ungrounded) connected. If the filter is delta connected, it is automatically ungrounded and the impedance controls are disabled.
You may specify a grounded or ungrounded wye-connected harmonic filter.
Ungrounded filters will not affect harmonics of the 3rd, 6th, 9th, 12th, etc. order.
3. To display the harmonic filter on the diagram, click once in the Visible check box to
place a check mark there.
4. To indicate that the selected harmonic filter is in service, click the In service check box.
This is the default setting. If In service is not checked, the harmonic filter is out of
service.
5. Click the OK button to accept your changes.
Confidential
8-9
Harmonic Analysis
Setting Harmonic Analysis Options
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Performing a Harmonic Analysis
The results for the harmonic number you specified in analysis options are displayed on the diagram.
Confidential
8-11
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
THD
Waveform
Spectrum
Nodal Impedance
Harmonic Number
8-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
Node name: Select the name of the node you are interested in. As soon as this name is selected
from the list, a plot will be generated. Some waveforms take longer to draw than others. A Progress
View is provided so that you may monitor the progress of the plot.
When a plot is being generated, the Pause and Abort buttons will become available to allow
you to interrupt or cancel the generation of the waveform.
Once the waveform is generated and the plot is complete, or immediately after the Pause or Abort
buttons are selected, you can select another node or modify the scales and ranges.
To display a waveform plot, select the desired plot from the toolbar. The following plots are
available:
Harmonic Voltage
Harmonic Spectrum
Nodal Impedance
Confidential
8-13
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
Confidential
8-15
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
8-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Viewing Results of a Harmonic Analysis
Confidential
8-17
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2
V
R = real -------------
*
FsS
2
V
X = imag -------------
*
Fs S
where:
V = voltage
R = resistance
X = reactance
Fs = fundamental frequency (series portion)
S* = complex conjugate load power P jQ (per phase)
The variation of impedance with harmonic number is then given by:
Z( H) = H
C s1
R + jH
C s2
where:
Z(H) = impedance at harmonic number
For the static parallel portion of the load the resistance and reactance at fundamental frequency are:
2
V
R = ---------FpP
V
X = ----------Fp Q
where:
R = resistance
X = reactance
V = voltage
Fp = fundamental frequency (parallel portion)
P = kW
Q = kvar
8-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
C p1
C p2
R
X
where:
Cp1 = load skin effect exponent (parallel portion of load)
Cp2 = load reactance exponent (parallel portion of load)
R (H) = H
C3
where:
R0(H) = zero-sequence resistance at harmonic number H
Induction machine reactances vary with harmonic as:
*
X (H) = H
C4
where:
X0(H) = zero-sequence reactance at harmonic number H
C4 = machine reactance exponent
Equivalent impedance at a given slip is calculated using resistances and reactances that have been
adjusted for frequency as just stated. At harmonic frequencies, slip is calculated as:
( 1.0 s 1 )
s ( H ) = 1.0 -----------------------H
where:
s(H) = slip at harmonic number
s1 = slip at fundamental frequency
Confidential
8-19
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When the induction machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number H
Rg = grounding resistance
Xg = grounding reactance
C1 = grounding skin effect exponent
C2 = grounding reactance exponent
Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
C3
Ra
R2 ( H ) = H
C3
R2
where:
Ra(H) = armature resistance at harmonic number
R2(H) = negative-sequence resistance at harmonic number
Synchronous machine reactances vary with harmonic as:
X d( H) = H
C4
X d
X0 ( H ) = H
C4
X0
where:
Xd(H) = subtransient reactance at harmonic number
X0 = zero-sequence reactance
C4 = machine reactance exponent
8-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
Z 1 ( H ) = R a ( H ) + jX d ( H )
Z 2 ( H ) = R 2 ( H ) + jX d ( H )
where:
Z0 = zero-sequence impedance
Z1 = positive-sequence impedance
Z2 = negative-sequence impedance
When the synchronous machine is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = the grounding impedance at the harmonic number
C1 = grounding skin effect exponent
C2 = grounding reactance exponent
Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
C3
( 1000kV KVAr a )
where:
kV = base kV of capacitor
KVAra = reactive power or capacitor
When the shunt capacitor/reactor is grounded the grounding impedance is calculated as:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
where:
Zg(H) = grounding impedance at harmonic number
C1 = grounding skin effect exponent
C2 = grounding reactance exponent
Grounding resistance and reactance are in series.
Confidential
8-21
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Note that impedance type shunts are modeled in harmonic analysis as loads, while zig-zag
type shunts are modeled as transformers.
IEEE line
IEEE cable
Custom
0.646H
r 1 ( H ) = L r 1 1 + --------------------------------------------
2
192.0 + 0.518H
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + ( L H ( r0 r1 ) )
x1 ( H ) = L H x1
x0 ( H ) = L H x0
b1 ( H ) = L H b1
b0 ( H ) = L H b0
0.5
r0 ( H ) = r1 ( H ) + L H ( r0 r1 )
x1 ( H ) = L H x1
x0 ( H ) = L H x0
b1 ( H ) = L H b1
b0 ( H ) = L H b0
C1
x1 ( H ) = H
C3
b1 ( H ) = H
C5
C2
r1
r0 ( H ) = H
x1
x0 ( H ) = H
b1
b0 ( H ) = H
C4
C6
r0
x0
b0
where:
r1 = positive-sequence resistance
x1 = positive-sequence reactance
b1 = positive-sequence branch admittance
r0 = zero-sequence resistance
x0 = zero-sequence reactance
b0 = zero-sequence branch admittance
C1 = positive-sequence skin effect exponent
8-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
0 ( H ) =
Z c0 ( H ) =
( r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j10
b1 ( H ) )
b0 ( H ) )
r 1 ( H ) + jx 1 ( H )
-------------------------------------------6
0.0 + j10 b 1 ( H )
( r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H ) ) ( 0.0 + j10
r 0 ( H ) + jx 0 ( H )
-------------------------------------------6
0.0 + j10 b 0 ( H )
Z c1 ( H )
2
6
1 ( H ) L
10
2
Z c1 ( H )
R 0 ( H ) = real ( Z c0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) )
X 0 ( H ) = imag ( Z c0 ( H ) sin h ( 0 ( H ) L ) )
6
0 ( H ) L
10
2
Z c0 ( H )
6
0 ( H ) L
10
Z c0 ( H )
2
Confidential
8-23
Harmonic Analysis
Harmonic Models Used in PSS/ADEPT
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
where:
R1 = positive-sequence resistance
X1 = positive-sequence reactance
B1 = positive-sequence branch admittance
R0 = zero-sequence resistance
X0 = zero-sequence reactance
B0 = zero-sequence branch admittance
G0 = lumped parameter zero-sequence shunt conductance
G1 = lumped parameter positive-sequence shunt conductance
8.9.6 Transformers
There are two harmonic models of a transformer:
IEEE model
Custom model
IEEE Transformer
Leakage impedance is given by:
Z1 ( H ) = H
1.15
R1 + j ( H X1 )
Custom Transformer
Leakage impedance is given by:
Z1 ( H ) = H
C3
R1 + j H
C4
X 1
Grounding impedance, if it exists, is treated the same for all models of the transformer:
Zg ( H ) = H
C1
Rg + j H
C2
X g
8-24
Confidential
Chapter 9
Distribution Reliability
Analysis
9.1 Overview: Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA)
The ability to determine service reliability is a growing concern, especially given that many customer
service interruptions are caused by problems with the distribution portion of the overall system. Reliability techniques can be used to measure past performance and predict future reliability
performance for a distribution system. Distribution reliability indices are used to quantify the performance of the system, and evaluate the effectiveness of enhancements and upgrades in order to
improve the reliability of distribution circuits.
The reliability of distribution systems is evaluated by using industry standard reliability indices.
PSS/ADEPTs Distribution Reliability Analysis (DRA) option determines standard reliability indices
and interruption profiles of the distribution system based on system topology, location of protection
equipment and reliability data for each network branch item. The DRA analysis tool enables various
design options to be explored so that a system with the best or most appropriate level of reliability
can be chosen for the least possible cost before the system is built.
9.1.1 Nomenclature
Outage An outage signifies a network item that is not available to perform its intended function
due to some event. Depending on the network configuration, an outage may or may not cause service to a customer to be interrupted.
Failure A failure indicates the state of a network item when it is not available to perform its function
due to an event or circumstance. A failure normally results in an outage of the network item, however an outage does not necessarily indicate a failure.
Failure Rate The number of failures per unit length per time of a network item. The failure rate is
normally expressed in terms of the number of failures per mile per year. PSS/ADEPT does not
restrict unit classification as long as the failure rate is consistent across each network item. The unit
of failures per km per year is perfectly acceptable.
Failure Duration The time period from the initiation of a failure until the network item is repaired
or replaced so that it is able to perform its intended function. The failure duration is normally
expressed in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 1.5 = 1 hour, 30 minutes).
Switch Time The time period from the time a switching operation is required due to a forced
system outage until the actual switching operation occurs. The switch time is normally expressed
in hours or a fraction thereof (e.g., 0.5 = 30 minutes).
Confidential
9-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Interruption The loss of service to one or more customers caused by one or more outages to the
distribution system.
Interruption Duration The time period from the initial customer interruption until service to the
customer has been restored. The time period is normally expressed in hours.
Momentary Interruption A service interruption that is limited to the time period required to restore
customer service by automatic or controlled switching operations or by manual switching at locations where a system operator is immediately available. These switching operations must be
completed in a specified time (e.g., 5 minutes). The switch time indicating an automatic switching
operation is specified as 0.1 hours or 6 minutes to the DRA analysis module.
Sustained Interruption A service interruption that lasts for more than 0.1 hours.
9-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The Distribution Reliability Analysis Module (DRA) module is an option in PSS/ADEPT. You will not
be able to access this module if you have not purchased a DRA license. If you wish to purchase a
license, please contact PTI for further assistance.
Calculations of reliability indices depend on reliability information such as failure rates and repair
times specified at each branch in the network. These reliability parameters are specified as properties of a branch device and can be entered either through the construction dictionary or a network
item property sheet. These specified reliability parameters are used to determine the reliability
indices for the entire system and each protection zone. A protection zone is an area of the network
that contains a piece of protection equipment (e.g., fuse). Network items downstream from one protection device and upstream of another protective device compose a protection zone. The network
below (Figure 9-1) illustrates a system with 3 protection zones.
Confidential
9-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
When a DRA analysis is performed, you will be able to obtain the following reliability indices for the
entire network and for each individual protection zone:
System Average Interruption Duration Index (SAIDI) The average time the customers are interrupted. Also referred to as the customer minutes of interruptions or
customer hours. The definition is:
SAIDI
Additionally, customer information such as the number of customers served (Cs) and the total
number of customers interrupted (Ci) are also determined and can be displayed on the diagram or
in a text report.
In this chapter you will learn how to:
9-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Fuses.
Tie switches.
Confidential
9-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Momentary failure rate per year (M) (for use in future releases).
Table 9-1. Data Item Requirements for DRA
Network Item
MTTR
MTTS
PSS
Line
Switch
Tie Switch
Fuse
Breaker
Recloser
Sectionalizer
Series Capacitor/Reactor
Transformer
For each network branch item, DRA will consider the effects of installing protection equipment, such
as breakers, reclosers, sectionalizers, fuses and switches. Table 9-2 provides some sample reliability data not to be used as actual data but to show relative numbers.
Table 9-2. Sample Reliability Data
Component
MTTR
MTTS
PSS
Line
0.5
0.05
Switch
.03
10
Tie Switch
.03
10
Fuse
.01
Transformer
.001
Breaker
.03
12
Recloser
.03
12
Confidential
9-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
9-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Double-click on the item that you wish to modify (Line in this example). A default properties sheet will appear for the type of network item selected. Figure 9-4 displays the
Default Line Properties sheet for the selected Line item.
9-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. On the Main tab, either select a construction type from the construction dictionary by
selecting an item from the drop down list, or by manually entering a name in the field
provided. If the specified construction type name corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary then the Impedance and Ratings fields are grayed out and not
editable. Otherwise, if a name is manually entered that does not correspond to an entry
in the construction dictionary and then the fields will be made editable as shown in
Figure 9-5.
Figure 9-5. Default Line Properties Sheet - Modifying the Construction Type
Confidential
9-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4. Select the DRA tab. If the selected construction type corresponded to an entry in the
construction dictionary, then the fields will be grayed out as shown in Figure 9-6. These
values must be modified within the construction dictionary.
Figure 9-6. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, from the Construction Dictionary
9-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Similarly, if the specified construction type does not correspond to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the fields will be editable as shown in Figure 9-7. These values can be
modified directly.
Figure 9-7. Default Line Properties Sheet DRA Tab, New Values for the Reliability
Parameters
5. Select OK to return to the Tree View. When a new line is added, the default reliability
parameters, specified in the previous step will be associated with the newly added line.
Default reliability parameters may be specified for any branch type including switches,
transformers, and series capacitors/reactors.
Confidential
9-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
3. Select the DRA tab. If the previously specified construction type does not correspond
to an entry in the construction dictionary then the reliability parameter fields will be set
to 999. New reliability parameter values can be entered directly into the fields, as
shown in Figure 9-9.
Figure 9-9. Line Property Sheet: DRA Tab, New Values for Reliability Parameters
The values entered are only for the device that was selected and can only be stored in the
native ADEPT file (*.adp) or in the network dump (Hub) file (*.dmp). If you wish to use the
specified construction type and corresponding reliability parameters again, it is recommended that you create a specific entry in the construction dictionary.
If the previously specified construction type corresponds to an entry in the construction dictionary, then the reliability parameters will be obtained directly from the construction dictionary and the fields will be grayed out and not editable. Refer to Section 9.4.3 for further
information on modifying these values.
Confidential
9-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The following fields may or may not be present depending on the device property sheet
selected.
Switch type: This is only used and shown on the Switch Property sheet. Select from
the available list one of the following available devices:
Tie: Tie switches are modeled as open switches having normal switch behavior.
Tie switches in the network are specified by checking the box labeled Tie Switch
on the General tab. To model a tie switch in DRA, select Open status and check
the Tie Switch box. On the DRA tab, select Tie. Automatic tie switches can be
modeled by setting the switch time to a value less than or equal to 0.1.
Manual: Specify this type for disconnects, bypass switches, airbrakes, load break
switches or any other switches that must be operated by a line crew.
Auto: Specify this type for motorized or automatic switches that do not require a
line crew to operate. Additionally, specify a switch time less than or equal to 0.l to
classify automatic operation.
Fuse: Specify this type for expulsion cutouts (fuses) and current limiting fuses used
to provide one shot system protection.
Recloser: Specify this type for devices that automatically reclose during or after a
fault condition. Reclosers will repeatedly interrupt fault current until the fault is
cleared or the device locks out.
Sectionalizer: Specify this type for devices that do not have the ability to interrupt
fault current such as sectionalizers.
Sustained failure rate: Enter the sustained failure rate of the item per unit length per
unit time.
Momentary failure rate: Enter the momentary failure rate of the item per unit length
per unit time.
Mean time to repair: Enter the mean time to repair the failed network item (hours).
Mean time to switch : Enter the mean time to switch (hours). This is the time it takes for
the switch to operate. If this time is less than or equal to 0.1 DRA will consider this an
automatic or motorized switch. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only.
Probability of successful switch: Enter the probability that the switch will be operated
successfully. This value is specified between 0 and 1 with 1 indicating 100% probability
and 0 indicating 0% probability. This field is applicable to the Switch Property sheet only.
4. Select OK to return to the diagram.
9-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Maps To
BREAKER
Breaker
FUSE
Fuse
RECLOSER
Recloser
FUSESWITCH
Fuse
A reliability record in the construction dictionary that is specified with a switch time less than or equal
to 0.1 will be automatically set to a switch type of Auto.
Confidential
9-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
2. Click the DRA tab to view the associated reliability parameters. In this case the values
will appear disabled (grayed-out) indicating that the parameters were obtained directly
from the construction dictionary (Figure 9-11).
Confidential
9-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
It is not likely that all loads will have the same customer density on the distribution circuit. For a
selected static load, an over-ride of the global kW per customer value is provided to offer flexibility
in establishing the number of customers served at a static load.
For the unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is equal to the sum of
the phases.
To change the kW per customer value used to determine the number of customers served:
1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View.
2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property
sheet.
3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW
and kvar values.
4. Click the DRA tab and select kW per customer.
5. Enter the kW per customer value for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three phase
value (balanced).
6. Select OK.
If the number of customers served by a load is already known, this can be represented by choosing
to directly enter the number of customers served for a selected static load.
To directly enter the number of customers served for an individual or selected group of loads:
1. Select a load or group of loads in either the Diagram or Network View.
2. Double-click on the static load in the Diagram View or Network View to view its property
sheet.
3. Select either Balanced or Unbalanced on the Main tab and enter the appropriate kW
and kvar values.
4. Click the DRA tab and select Number of Customers Served.
5. Enter the number of customers served for each phase (unbalanced) or the total three
phase value (balanced).
6. Select OK. For unbalanced loads, the total number of customer served at the load is
equal to the sum of the values specified at each phase.
9-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
9-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Solution target value (SAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for SAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Solution target value (CAIDI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for CAIDI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Solution target value (CAIFI): Enter the target value that you want to compare against
the calculated index for CAIFI. The diagram can be color-coded based on the target
value you specify.
Display messages in progress window: Check the box to display error and general
messages to the progress window.
3. Select OK to return to the diagram.
Confidential
9-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
9-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Customers served (Cs): Check this box to display the number of customers
served at each static load.
Customers interrupted (Ci): Check this box to display the number of customers
interrupted at each static load.
Color Coding:
Use DRA colors: Check this box to specify DRA color-coding following an analysis. Choosing this option will automatically set your diagram color-coding mode to
"Branches by DRA target comparison".
SAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
SAIFI index and the target value specified for SAIFI in the DRA analysis options.
SAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
SAIDI index and the target value specified for SAIDI in the DRA analysis options.
CAIFI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
CAIFI index and the target value specified for CAIFI in the DRA analysis options.
CAIDI: When selected, the diagram will be color-coded based on the calculated
CAIDI index and the target value specified for CAIDI in the DRA analysis options.
<50%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 50% of the
target value specified in the analysis options.
<75%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 75% of the
target value specified in the analysis options.
<100%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 100% of
the target value specified in the analysis options.
<125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that fall below 125% of
the target value specified in the analysis options.
>125%: Choose the color to indicate the selected indices that are equal to or above
125% of the target value specified in the analysis options.
Enable Display:
Confidential
SAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIFI for each protection
zone on the diagram.
SAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for SAIDI for each protection
zone on the diagram.
CAIDI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIDI for each protection
zone on the diagram.
CAIFI: Check this box to show the calculated value for CAIFI for each protection
zone on the diagram.
9-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The results of the DRA analysis will be displayed on the diagram according to the results display
options you specified.
A text report is available that contains reliability indices, number of customers served and number
of customers interrupted. To obtain a DRA report, select Report>Distribution Reliability Analysis
from the Main Menu.
9-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
9-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
=
=
=
=
0.17
0.29
1.00
1.75
Assume that a month later, a fault occurs on the same circuit somewhere on line section Line3
(length = 4.0 units), indicated in Figure 9-17.
9-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If this is the only fault to occur in this line section, the outage rate is 0.25, and the duration is 3.5
hours. This event does not impact the outage rate or duration for the previous case. It does however
impact the reliability indices, which will now include both events.
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.17
3.79
1.17
3.25
The analysis becomes more complicated the larger the circuit and the more protection devices
(zones) it contains. DRA is designed to perform the calculations on the larger, more complicated
systems.
This example illustrates the basic concepts used by DRA when analyzing the reliability of a distribution system in non-storm conditions. In summary, the basic analysis performed by DRA has the
following properties:
9-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to all customers served. Based
upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results:
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.68
4.83
1.68
2.87
Figure 9-19. DRA Results Shown with Text Labels and Color-Coding
9-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Add a protection device downstream of node 5, between node 5 and node 9, and determine the
impact on the indices.
Confidential
9-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A permanent fault in this new section will result in the loss of power to only the new customers
served. Based upon the assumed reliability parameters, this addition will have the following results:
SAIFI
SAIDI
CAIFI
CAIDI
=
=
=
=
1.22
3.90
1.22
3.50
9-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
In Figure 9-21, the global kw per customer command was used. For the circuit shown in Figure 920, we have changed the analysis parameters to reflect the following customer served values of;
C1 = 100; C2 = 150; C3 = 120; C4 = 50; and C5 = 40. This will change the calculated values of the
reliability indices. The results are shown in the figure below.
Confidential
9-33
9-34
Confidential
Appendix A
Modeling and File Differences
Between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT
A.1 Transformer Modeling
A.1.1 Transformer Changes From PSS/U to PSS/ADEPT
Transformer modeling in PSS/ADEPT is on a more physical basis than that in PSS/U. In
PSS/ADEPT, the actual transformer windings are modeled making it easier to change the transformer by simply specifying the windings present. In addition, PSS/ADEPT has no restrictions on
loops or parallel branches; therefore, in a three-phase branch it is possible to have one phase be a
regulating transformer, one phase a switch, and the other phase a line (although the user may not
want to connect the network this way). The increased power and flexibility in PSS/ADEPT causes
some restrictions when sending data back and forth between PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U. Here, PTI
has attempted to provide guidelines on modeling transformers in PSS/ADEPT and trading the transformers back and forth between the two versions of the program.
Wye-wye.
Wye-delta (30).
Delta-wye (30).
Delta-delta.
Wye-connected autoregulator.
Delta-connected autoregulator.
Center-tapped delta.
Wye-connected autotransformer.
Z Wye (30).
Z Wye (150).
Confidential
A-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
YY
ABC
Drawing
AB
Y +30
ABC
AB
A-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Y +30
ABC
Drawing
AB
ABC
AB
Confidential
A-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Y conn
Auto Reg
ABC
Drawing
AB
A-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
conn
Auto
ABC
Drawing
AB
(CA
open)
Confidential
A-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.1.3 Reading Transformers From PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
A.1.3.1 Conversion of Transformer Types
Due to modeling restrictions that exist in PSS/U, there are some special transformer types; the open
delta auto regulator (Type 4, 5, or 6), the line-to-line auto regulator (Type 7, 8, or 9) and the line-toneutral auto regulator (Type 13, 14, or 15). The modeling restrictions have been removed in
PSS/ADEPT; the above nine transformers can be modeled in PSS/ADEPT using the wye-wye, wyedelta, delta-wye, delta-delta, delta-connected regulator, or wye-connected regulator (with sometimes a switch in parallel). Therefore, when a Type 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 13, 14, or 15 transformer is
encountered in a raw data file, it is converted to one of the PSS/ADEPT types. The conversions for
all transformers read into PSS/ADEPT from a raw data file are shown in Table A-2.
Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT
PSS/U
Type
PSS/U Name
Phase
PSS/ADEPT
Name
Phase
Comments
Wye-wye
Any
Wye-wye
Wye-delta (30)
ABC
Wye-delta (30)
ABC
Wye-delta (30)
AB
Wye-delta (30)
AB
Exact match.
Approximate match; PSS/ADEPT removes
the phase C (C to A) winding on both sides
of the transformer, while PSS/U does not
remove any of the transformer windings.
Wye-delta (30)
BC
Wye-delta (30)
BC
Wye-delta (30)
CA
Wye-delta (30)
CA
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Wye-delta (30)
Delta-wye (30)
ABC
Delta-wye (30)
ABC
Delta-wye (30)
AB
Delta-wye (30)
AB
Delta-wye (30)
BC
Delta-wye (30)
BC
Delta-wye (30)
CA
Delta-wye (30)
CA
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
Delta-wye (30)
A-6
Exact match.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table A-2. Conversion of Transformers from PSS/U Raw Data File into PSS/ADEPT (Cont.)
PSS/U
Type
PSS/U Name
Phase
PSS/ADEPT
Name
Phase
Comments
Open delta
regulator AB
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Open delta
regulator BC
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
CA
Open delta
regulator CA
open
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
AB
Phase AB
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Phase BC
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Phase CA
line-to-line auto
regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
10
Delta-connected
auto regulator
Any
Delta-connected
auto regulator
ABC
11
Delta-delta
Any
Delta-delta
12
Wye-connected
auto regulator
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
13
AN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
14
BN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
15
CN auto
Any
Wye-connected
auto regulator
Confidential
A-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
V
Z base = 1000
------------------------Rating
A-8
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
PSS/U Type
Phasing
PSS/U
Number
PSS/U Type
Phasing
4, 5, 6
Any
4, 5, 6
ABC
Any
AB
Any
BC
Any
CA
10
Delta-connected auto
regulator
Any
10
Delta-connected auto
regulator
ABC
11
Delta-delta
Any
11
Delta-delta
ABC
13
AN auto regulator
Any
13
AN auto regulator
14
BN auto regulator
Any
12
Wye-connected auto
regulator
15
CN auto regulator
Any
12
Wye-connected auto
regulator
PSS/ADEPT
PSS/ADEPT
Original PSS/U
PSS/U
Original
Type 12
Type 13
bN
b
c
98061
Confidential
A-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
4
Z base = ------ = 8
2
The grounding resistor is then 4/8 = 0.5 pu. Specify the transformer as: wye-delta (+30);
666.7 kVA; Z1 = 0.005 + j.045 pu; Z0 = 1.505 + j.045 pu.
For wye-delta or delta-wye transformers, there is no need for any impedance adjustment because
of the winding configuration. Assuming no grounding impedances in the wye windings, set the
positive- and zero-sequence impedances equal. The transformer model itself will provide the correct behavior, blocking zero-sequence flow on the delta side of the transformer and shunting zerosequence currents to ground on the wye side.
A-10
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
pair of windings, commonly called Z12, Z13 and Z23. The impedance for each of the three transformers is then found as:
Z 12 + Z 13 Z 23
Z 1 = ----------------------------------------2
Z 12 + Z 23 Z 13
Z 2 = ----------------------------------------2
Z 13 + Z 23 Z 12
Z 3 = ----------------------------------------2
Figure A-2 represents the composition of a three-winding transformer into three two-winding
transformers.
Node 1
Node 2
Node 1
Node 2
Dummy
Node
Node 3
Node 3
98062
Confidential
A-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To complete the three-winding model, Z12, Z13, and Z23 are needed. Z12 is just the leakage impedance of the transformer. Sometimes a manufacturer will also supply Z13 and Z23. Another possibility
is that the manufacturer will supply the zero-sequence excitation current for the two windings, and
the impedances over to the delta winding can be calculated from this current. If no information is
available on the impedances, and the grounding effect must be modeled, set Z13 and Z23 in the
0.50 to 0.75 pu range. For each of the three transformers, set the zero-sequence impedance equal
to the positive-sequence value (unless an adjustment of the zero-sequence impedance is needed
because of grounding impedances).
Z mboost + Z mbuck
Z leak = -------------------------------------------------2
However, this impedance may not be the one viewed by the user; the manufacturer might specify
the impedance at maximum boost, at maximum buck, at a particular tap setting, or even the average
of all taps. The tabulation below shows how to convert the manufacturer-supplied value into the
value required by PSS/ADEPT. The symbol, D, is the range of the transformer from nominal (for a
13.8-kV regulating transformer that had an adjustment range from 0.90 to 1.10 pu, D = 0.1). The
symbol "a" represents the transformer tap setting (for the above transformer the tap ranges from
0.90, maximum buck, to 1.10, maximum boost).
Manufacturer-Supplied Value
A-12
PSS/ADEPT Value
Zleak
2
1+
Z mboost --------------------2
(1 )
2
1+
Z mbuck --------------------2
(1 )
2 2
a Za 1 + 2
--------------------- -----------------------2
2
( a 1 ) ( 1 2 )
2
1+
3 Z avg -----------------------2 2
(1 )
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The model in PSS/ADEPT causes the impedance to vary with tap position as it does in the real
transformer. Set the zero-sequence impedance equal to the positive-sequence impedance unless
there is a grounding impedance inserted (in a delta-configured regulator, the zero-sequence would
always be equal to the positive-sequence value.
In PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U, the rating for a regulating transformer is the total apparent power
through the transformer. In a transformer specification sheet, the rating of the transformer is sometimes given as that of the series winding alone.
A.2.7 Autotransformers
Presently, there are no autotransformer models in PSS/ADEPT. Autotransformers are invariably
wye connected, and they can be modeled using the wye-wye transformer. External to the transformer, all voltages and currents will be the same as if an actual autotransformer model had been
used. The autotransformer neutral current will not be modeled, but neutral currents are not available
to the user of any of the transformer models. For the case when the autotransformer has a
grounding impedance in it, it can be placed in either winding of the wye-wye transformer. Consider
T to be the ratio of the high-side nominal voltage to the low-side nominal voltage, and Zg the
grounding impedance (ohm) inserted at the neutral of the autotransformer. In the wye-wye transformer, the user can either insert (T-1)2 Zg in the neutral of the high-side winding, or (T-1)2 Zg/T2 in
the neutral of the low-voltage winding.
Example:
A 69-kV to 34.5-kV autotransformer is to be modeled. There is a 4-ohm grounding resistance in the neutral of the autotransformer. How should it be modeled as a wye-wye transformer?
For this autotransformer, T = 69/34.5 = 2.0. Use a wye-wye transformer with a primary
winding voltage of 69 kV and a secondary winding voltage of 34.5 kV. The grounding
impedance can be placed in either winding. On the high side, make the grounding resistance equal to 4 ohm; or, if the user wishes to place the grounding resistor in the low-side
winding, make it 1 ohm. After inserting the grounding resistance in the desired winding, proceed to calculate the positive- and zero-sequence impedances as would normally be done
for the transformer (i.e., set the positive-sequence impedance equal to the transformer
leakage impedance specified by the manufacturer and add three times the grounding resistance, after converting to pu, to get the zero-sequence impedance).
Confidential
A-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Z Matrix
Terminals
Internal
Source
98060
Although there is some interplay between the two at larger angles, the user can generally think of
the internal source angle controlling the real power and the magnitude controlling the reactive
power. In the real machine, these two values correspond to the internal machine angle and the field
excitation. The impedance matrix uses the machine armature resistance, machine subtransient
reactance, and machine zero-sequence impedance. Because the subtransient reactance is used,
for heavy real power flow, the machine will not slip poles as soon as an actual machine will, which
is essentially a source behind synchronous reactance. However, if the specified real power is large
enough, the machine will slip poles even with the subtransient reactance in the matrix. In that case,
the load flow will fail to converge. In other words, if the machine is grossly overloaded or if voltage
at the machines terminals is seriously depressed, the load flow will not converge. Either case is
abnormal and the machines should be taken out of service.
A-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Even though the internal voltage of the machine is balanced positive sequence, the terminal voltage
will not necessarily be so, if the rest of the network is unbalanced. The unbalanced terminal voltage
calculated by PSS/ADEPT should match well with the actual voltage in the field, if the rest of the
network is modeled accurately.
The present synchronous machine model automatically adjusts the field excitation (internal source
magnitude) during the load flow. There is no model for a synchronous motor with the field under
manual control.
As with a real machine, the PSS/ADEPT synchronous machine will run if only two phases are connected, or, if the machine zero-sequence impedance is small enough, will run even if only one
phase is connected. The machine is modeled wye connected; if the user wishes to model a deltaconnected machine, the zero-sequence impedance must be very high (20 to 50 pu is suggested).
Large synchronous machines with wye-connected armature windings are often grounded through
a transformer, with the output of the transformer connected to a relay. The effect of the relay burden
is a large grounding impedance, which the user models by specifying a high zero-sequence impedance of the machine. Therefore, it may be rare to find a synchronous machine with a small zerosequence impedance. In future versions of PSS/ADEPT, the machine grounding impedance will be
specified separately; currently, the user must bundle it into the machine zero-sequence impedance.
In the future, the user will also have a choice between wye- and delta-connected armature windings.
Confidential
A-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Condition
Xd and flat (only conditions available)
Xd and flat
Xd and var limits at 0.5, -0.5
Xd and var limits at 0.05, -0.05
There are two short circuit routines in PSS/U: MTSC and LPSC. Both give the same results and
operate on a flat network with all internal voltages (sources and machines) set to unity. LPSC has
an option to partially consider nonflat conditions, but cannot be used on compare.dat because the
network is not balanced. The machine fault current calculated by PSS/ADEPT is considerably
higher (370 A). It is higher because PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for the actual system
condition. In this network, the synchronous machine at node A1 is supplying considerable reactive
power to try to hold its terminal voltage to schedule (1.0 pu). The result is a rather high internal
voltage for the machine and a resulting large fault current. If the var limits for the machine are
changed to a narrow range (as shown in the last line of Table A-4), then the machine will not supply
as much reactive power, the internal voltage will be closer to unity, and the fault current results will
be closer to those calculated by MTSC and LPSC. This illustrates the differences that may occur in
synchronous machine fault currents between PSS/U and PSS/ADEPT. The most important thing for
the user to remember is that PSS/ADEPT calculates fault currents for the network conditions that
exist after a load flow simulation is done.
A-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A common way to start large machines is with an autotransformer; on the property sheet of each
synchronous machine, the autotransformer starting method is offered. The user puts in the value of
the starting tap and the transformer leakage impedance. The size of the starting transformer is
assumed to be the same as the machine size. Since transformer sizes in PSS/ADEPT are specified
per phase, and machines sizes are specified three phase. If desired, the user can think of the transformer size per phase as being 1/3 of the machine size.
Some discussion of the starting transformer impedance is in order. The value specified is assumed
by PSS/ADEPT to be the impedance at a tap setting of 0.65. The impedance of the transformer is
a function of tap position, and actually goes to zero at a tap of unity, since the connection to the
machine is straight through. If we call T the tap position and Z0.65 the transformer leakage impedance when T = 0.65, then the impedance ZT at any tap position is given by:
2
4.449 Z 0.65 ( 1 T )
Z T = ---------------------------------------------------2 (T 1) + 1
Then, if the user has the impedance at any other tap, the value to enter is calculated as:
ZT [ 2 T ( T 1 ) + 1 ]
Z 0.65 = -----------------------------------------------2
4.449 ( 1 T )
The table below shows various values calculated from the equation.
Confidential
Impedance Tap
Value to Enter
0.9
18.4 Z0.90
0.8
0.75
3.82 Z0.80
2.25 Z0.75
0.65
Z0.65
0.5
0.45 Z0.5
A-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Method
Condition
PSS/ADEPT
No starting transformer
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
0.93
PSS/U
0.88
PSS/U
0.93
PSS/U
0.86
PSS/ADEPT
0.90
PSS/U
0.91
The synchronous machine at node A1 is a type 91, and in the motor dictionary for this machine the
impedance of the starting transformer is listed as 0.0 + j0.05. The results for PSS/ADEPT and
PSS/U agree when the starting transformer tap is set at 0.65, but they do not agree when the tap is
set at 1.0 (PSS/ADEPT calculates 0.86 pu and PSS/U 0.88 pu). As mentioned above, the difference
is that PSS/U does not model the change of transformer impedance with tap change. If the machine
type is changed to 92 in PSS/U, then the results agree for a tap of 1.0. The reason is that the
Machine Dictionary listing for the type 92 machine has the starting transformer impedance set at
0.0 + j0.0. A starting simulation is also shown with the transformer taps set at 0.8; the results
between the two programs differ slightly, again because the simpler model in PSS/U is not modeling
the change of transformer impedance.
A-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
doing short circuit simulations or are doing motor starting simulations, then the explicit machine
model should be used. However, if you are doing only loadflow calculations, and a machine (or
group of machines) merely represent a real and reactive load, and you are not interested in the variance of the motor load with system voltage, then you should probably use one of the simpler loads,
like a constant power load.
The PSS/ADEPT induction machine steady state positive-sequence model is shown in Figure A-3.
This circuit, found in engineering textbooks, models a double cage machine, ra + jXa is the armature
impedance, Xm is the magnetizing reactance, and rn/s and jXn are the rotor cage values, where n
= 1 is the first cage and n = 2 refers to the second. On the Induction Machine Property sheet, the
inner cage is the first cage and the outer cage is the second. The machine slip is s, where s = 0 at
synchronous speed and s = 1 at standstill. The electrical input to the machine is:
S = V t I a*
And the shaft mechanical output power (neglecting friction and windage losses) is:
2 r1
2 r2
P m ( s ) = I 1 ( s ) ----- + I 2 ( s ) ----- ( 1 s )
s
s
The same model, with s = 2, is used to model the machine negative sequence behavior. At present,
all PSS/ADEPT induction machines are delta connected so zero-sequence parameters are not
needed. Since Y connected induction machines are almost always ungrounded, the present
PSS/ADEPT model can represent both Y and delta connections.
Xa
ra
+
Vt
Ia
r1/s
I1
r2/s
I2
Xm
X1
X2
Confidential
A-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
machine with the kW units selected. The design letters will be discussed in the next
section.
2. Specify the machine loading, either the electrical real power input (units of kW) or the
shaft power output in hp or kW, again according to the setting of the flag on the property
sheet.
Note again that a shaft power of output of 200 hp with the flag set to hp is the
same as a shaft power output of 149 kW with the flag set to kW units.
Impedance
ra
0.03 pu
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.03
Xa
Xm
0.08
0.09
0.08
0.05
0.10
2.8
2.8
3.0
2.8
2.8
r1 (inner)
X1 (inner)
r2 (outer)
0.015
0.025
0.04
0.115
0.01
0.11
0.11
0.18
0.05
0.15
0.07
0.15
0.10
9999*
0.06
X2 (outer)
rlocked rotor
0.06
0.04
0.01
9999*
0.15
0.0565
0.0753
0.117
0.161
0.0461
Xlocked rotor
0.126
0.149
0.120
0.104
0.175
0.118
0.119
0.0894
0.0991
0.173
0.186
0.196
0.250
0.0991
0.242
As mentioned, some induction machines will have the design letter on the nameplate, but in most
cases the user who is modeling the machine probably does not have this information. Some additional information about each design is given in Table A.11 to assist the user in determining the
design to use. In the table, the efficiency and power factor are for a fully loaded machine, with rated
A-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
terminal voltage. Pullout (breakdown) and starting torque are expressed as a multiple of the full load
torque, and starting current is expressed as a multiple of full load current. The locked rotor code,
shown on the bottom line of the table, is the code for each design if you accept the defaults. This
code can be changed, as discussed further below.
Table A-6.
NEMA Design
Parameter
1.21%
2.11%
2.89%
11.4%
0.845%
0.954
0.946
0.917
0.837
0.957
0.889
0.883
0.897
0.914
0.866
Starting current
7.25
5.99
5.98
5.22
5.53
Starting torque
1.62
1.91
2.81
3.50
0.59
Pullout torque
2.98
2.76
2.55
3.50
2.33
Slip at pullout
8.35
13.1
21.6
100
4.25
0.88
0.88
0.91
0.97
0.90
1.18
1.19
1.22
1.31
1.21
No friction or windage losses are included in the above values, and the magnetizing impedance
consists of only Xm, there is no resistive part. However, these omissions should result in only small
error.
As additional information, some of the normal uses of each NEMA design are:
NEMA A Older general purpose machine with a high starting current. Has been
largely replaced by the B design.
NEMA C Used for constant power loads requiring higher starting torque, such as
pumps, compressors and conveyers.
NEMA D High starting torque motor used with punches, shears, elevators and hoists.
NEMA E Low starting torque and high efficiency at full load. Used for fans and similar
loads.
Confidential
A-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
In PSS/ADEPT, if the electrical real power at the machine terminals is specified, the machine will
draw this real power and the power factor will vary as determined by the equivalent circuit. If the
mechanical output power is specified, the real electrical input power will vary with voltage because
the machine efficiency changes with voltage. The power factor will again be determined from the
equivalent circuit. In an unbalanced network, the total power drawn by the machine will be as specified, but it will not be distributed equally among the three phases. The machine negative-sequence
impedance comes into play in the unbalanced case.
There is one case where the induction machine will not draw the specified power, and that is when
it stalls. When the machine stalls, the equivalent circuit is replaced by the locked rotor impedance
in the loadflow simulation. A machine can stall if it is overloaded and/or the terminal voltage is low.
A-22
Input KVA/Output hp
Range
PSS/ADEPT
0 3.15
2.0
3.15 3.55
3.35
3.55 4.0
3.78
4.0 4.5
4.25
4.5 5.0
4.75
5.0 5.6
5.30
5.6 6.3
5.95
6.30 7.1
6.7
7.10 8.0
7.55
8.0 9.0
8.5
9.0 10.0
9.5
10.0 11.2
10.6
11.2 12.5
11.85
12.5 14.0
13.25
14.0 16.0
15.0
16.0 18.0
17.0
18.0 20.0
19.0
20.0 - 22.4
21.2
22.4 up
24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The NEMA codes dictate the absolute value of the starting machine impedance, while PSS/ADEPT
allows both a resistance and reactance to be used. The NEMA codes are implemented in
PSS/ADEPT using an Xlr/Rlr ratio of 1.5.
In PSS/ADEPT, the machine locked rotor impedance, whether derived from the code, from the
equivalent circuit, or directly specified by the user, represents the machine for starting simulations.
A loadflow is done to establish prestart conditions. An autotransformer is available for reduced
voltage starting. The use of the autotransformer starting is the same as for starting a synchronous
machine; please refer to Section A.3.1.5, Synchronous Machine Starting in PSS/ADEPT. Running
machines do not assist in the motor start; it is assumed that the transient fluxes in running machines
have decayed before the induction machine being started has reached normal speed. The omission
of the running machines results in the maximum voltage dip, which is what most users are interested in finding. An ungrounded machine will still contribute to a phase-to-ground fault if the system
(specifically the part of the system where the fault and machine are) is itself grounded.
In PSS/U, the locked rotor impedance also represented the machine when it was being started. A
prestart loadflow was done to set system conditions. A starting transformer was available, but the
transformer was simpler and less capable than the new one in PSS/ADEPT (in PSS/U the starting
transformer impedance did not change with tap setting). A starting simulation could be done with
running motors assisting the start, or not assisting the start. The simulation without assistance from
the surrounding motors was most important, since it calculated the greatest voltage dip. For this
reason, the simulation with assistance from running motors was dropped in PSS/ADEPT.
Confidential
A-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The source voltage behind the transient impedance will probably be different than the voltage
behind the subtransient impedance. In the synchronous machine, the transient and subtransient reactances are calculated from the stator, field and damper winding leakage reactances and
the magnetizing reactances. In the induction machine, the first cage can be considered the field
winding and the second cage the damper winding. The expressions for X d and X d , using the
notation of our induction machine equivalent circuit are
Xm X1
X d = X a + --------------------X +X
m
1
X d = X a + ----------------------------------1
1
1
-------- + ------- + ------Xm X1 X2
This procedure, by its very nature, assumes that the subtransient and transient periods can be separated. For synchronous machines there are time constants that indicate how long each period
lasts. For example, when calculating the fault current immediately after the fault, the current begins
at e X d and decays exponentially with a time constant d . Therefore, the subtransient period
ends at approximately d , and is followed by the transient period, which decays with time constant
d . The values for the two time constants can be obtained several ways; there are standard formulas, derived formulas, values from short circuit tests and values from frequency response tests.
Paul Krause* gives a good description of the various methods. This procedure depends on d
being considerably larger than d . Given below are some values for large synchronous machines,
also taken from Krause. The reactances are in pu and the time constants are number of 60 Hz
cycles.
Table A-8.
Xd
Type
Xd
.288
.202
111.7
2.28
.317
.240
54.3
2.86
As can be seen from Table A-8, there is a considerable difference in the magnitude of the transient
and subtransient time constants, so the idea of using the subtransient reactance for the first few
cycles followed by the transient reactance makes sense.
A-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Next, in Table A-9, are the reactances and time constants for the NEMA A, B, C, D and E induction
machines in PSS/ADEPT.
Table A-9.
Xd
Type
Xd
NEMA A
.186
.118
1.97
0.27
NEMA B
.196
.119
1.25
0.13
NEMA C
.250
.089
0.99
0.14
NEMA D
.099
.099
0.14
---
NEMA D
.242
.173
3.86
0.46
The transient time constants are several times larger than the subtransient values, which indicates
that the idea of separate transient and subtransient periods is valid. However, look at the absolute
value of the constants. The subtransient period is over in less than a cycle and the transient period
is complete in just a couple of cycles, except for the NEMA D machine when it lasts about four
cycles. The conclusion is that, for most induction machines, the fault current is gone in a very few
cycles. Generally the smaller the machine the faster the current decays. However, even a 2500 hp
induction motor fault current will probably be gone in four to five cycles. The user should be aware
of these short time constants when induction machine fault currents are used.
A suggested procedure for short circuit current for induction machines is to use the subtransient
impedance for all simulation. Assume the short circuit current exist only for a cycle or two for a
medium sized machine (few hundred hp) and perhaps up to four cycles for a larger machine.
Confidential
A-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
property sheet are updated. If desired, extensive changes can be made to the equivalent circuit
impedances; if this is done the user should be careful to design a realizable machine.
If you do change the impedances, PSS/ADEPT will check the values. Zero values of Xm, are not
allowed, and zero values of a reactance or resistance in either the inner or outer cage are not
allowed. The reason for this limitation is that such machines are not physically possible. If you wish
to model a single cage machine, then for R2 and X2 (the outer winding) put in values of 9999. These
large impedances will remove the cage from the machine.
In the discussion on induction machines it has been mentioned several times that the user simply
specifies the machine mechanical size while the equivalent circuit impedances are on the electrical
apparent power input base of the machine. PSS/ADEPT handles the conversions between the two
automatically, but some users would probably like to know the conversion details. For a NEMA
specified machine the equation is:
.746 Size hp
S B = -----------------------------------Eff PF
where SB is the electrical input apparent power base in kVA and Sizehp is the mechanical size in
hp. For and IEC machine, one less conversion is needed and the equation is:
Size kW
S B = --------------------Eff PF
where now the machine mechanical size is in kW.
A-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
If a machine in the raw data file has a machine type 71, 72, 89, 90 or 171, 172, 189, 190 the
situation is somewhat more straightforward since the values in the raw data file specify the mechanical power delivered by the machine and the mechanical size of the machine. So, the mechanical
power option is selected, the PSS/ADEPT machine power output is set to "LOAD" and the
PSS/ADEPT machine size is set to "RATING".
It is expected that users will infrequently write an PSS/ADEPT case back to the old raw data format,
because doing so causes the loss of so much information, both for machines and other network
elements. In case it is done, the induction machines will be written to the raw data file using the
inverse of the logic described in the above two paragraphs and with the following logic used for
assigning the old machine number. A machine with NEMA design B is given a 51 or 71 number, ,
and the design E is assigned 55 or 75. A user custom designed machine is given a 56 or 76 number.
Whether the fifty or seventy series is used depends of course on how the machine loading is specified in PSS/ADEPT. Also supplied with PSS/ADEPT is a motor dictionary named nema1998.mot;
it is a motor dictionary that shows the new PSS/ADEPT machines as they would have been modeled in PSS/U. The motor dictionary is displayed at the end of this section.
Confidential
A-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
easiest way is probably to increase the machine size. Setting the machine size to around 850 hp
will increase the reactive draw to 360 kvar. Another method to increase reactive power consumption
would be to lower the Xm value for the machine.
Example: 3
You are modeling a 575 kV 200 hp machine as a NEMA B model. The starting current for
the machine is about 1200 A. What locked rotor code should be selected for this machine?
Suggested procedure Calculate the kVA/hp number, which is:
3 1200 .575
-------------------------------------------- 6.0
200
Select the G locked rotor code for this machine.
Example: 4
You have an IEC model machine, the size is 100 kW, rated voltage is 500 V. The starting
current is about 750 A. What locked rotor code should by select?
Suggested procedure This is a 134 hp machine, so the NEMA kVA/hp value is:
3 750 .500
---------------------------------------- 4.8
134
Select the E locked rotor code, which in PSS/ADEPT uses a value of 4.75 for the E code, so the
starting current will be a little less than 750 A for a 1.0 pu terminal voltage. You can specify the
machine size either way, 100 kW with the kW (IEC) option or 134 hp with the hp (NEMA) option.
Example: 5
Consider a 500 hp NEMA B induction motor on a 2.3 kV bus. If it were initially unloaded and
the prefault terminal voltage were 1.0 pu, what fault current would be expected for a three
phase fault at the machine terminals if the default subtransient impedance were used.
Suggested procedure it is easy to explain how PSS/ADEPT calculates the fault current for a
machine, but it requires a considerable amount of complex arithmetic to get a numeric answer. For
the NEMA B design, the efficiency is .946 and the power factor .883 so the electrical base is 446.65
kVA. Assuming the machine is Y connected, the base impedance is then 2.30 x 2.30/.44665 = 11.84
. The armature resistance is .03 pu and the default subtransient reactance is .1190 pu, so the subtransient impedance in ohms is 1.45375.8. The unloaded machine still draws current for the
magnetizing reactance, a quick loadflow shows the current to be 38.78-89.4. For the fault calculation, the voltage e must be set up behind the subtransient impedance. With the prefault voltage
equal to 1.0 pu or 1328 V, the value for e is:
e = 1328 1.453 75.8 38.78 89.4 = 1273 .60V
Finally, the fault current for the three-phase fault at the terminals is:
1273 .60
I f = ------------------------------- = 876 75.2A
1.453 75.8
A quick simulation shows that this is close to the value PSS/ADEPT obtains. The PSS/ADEPT display shows the current reference into the device, while the above answer has a reference of current
out of the machine, so the PSS/ADEPT displayed angle will differ from our answer by 180.
A-28
Confidential
Zero
Sequence
2000
X0
99
51
R0
0
0.03
0.1183
52
2000
99
0.03
53
2000
99
54
2000
99
55
2000
71
2681
72
2681
99
0.03
0.119
0.03
0.196
0.0753
0.149
0.01
0.05
73
2681
99
0.05
0.0894
0.05
0.250
0.117
0.120
0.01
0.05
74
2681
99
0.05
0.0991
0.05
0.0991
0.161
0.104
0.01
0.05
75
2681
99
0.03
0.173
0.03
0.242
0.0461
0.175
0.01
0.05
Subtransient
Transient
Locked Rotor
Starting
Transformer
Xlr
0.126
rxfr
0.01
Xxfr
0.05
pf0.7
pf0.8
pf0.9
pf1.0
pf1.1
Eff
0.03
rlr
0.1858 0.0565
0.886
0.904
0.906
0.897
0.882
100
0.119
0.03
0.196
0.0753
0.149
0.01
0.05
0.867
0.893
0.897
0.891
0.877
100
0.05
0.0894
0.05
0.250
0.117
0.120
0.01
0.05
0.878
0.903
0.908
0.903
0.891
100
0.05
0.0991
0.05
0.0991
0.161
0.104
0.01
0.05
0.943
0.943
0.936
0.922
0.904
100
99
0.03
0.173
0.03
0.242
0.0461
0.175
0.01
0.05
0.791
0.857
0.874
0.873
0.863
100
99
0.03
0.1183
0.03
0.1858 0.0565
0.126
0.01
0.05
0.886
0.904
0.906
0.897
0.882
100
0.867
0.893
0.897
0.891
0.877
100
0.878
0.903
0.908
0.903
0.891
100
0.943
0.943
0.936
0.922
0.904
100
0.791
0.857
0.874
0.873
0.863
100
Size
Type
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
The listed power factor versus voltage curve only holds when the machine is fully loaded; even if
an induction machine is drawing no real power it will absorb a significant amount of reactive power
because of the magnetizing impedance Xm, which might vary from 2 to 4 pu. Unfortunately, the
PSS/U induction machine model is not this sophisticated, and the power factor in the dictionary is
applied regardless of the specified real power. Therefore, if the specified power is equal to the
machine size, you can expect the PSS/ADEPT and PSS/U results to match very closely for these
NEMA machines. However, if the specified power is less (or more) than the size, there will be some
discrepancy in the loadflow results.
The PSS/U model also has no ability to stall the machine, so for heavy loading or low terminal voltages the results may not match for the induction machine.
A-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
File Types
Files
*.rel
parmpu.dat
*.eco
parmpr.dat
*.brk
parmps.dat
*.dev
pscript.dat
*.lvb
resource.prm
*.idv
windows.prm
*.drw
*.sgf
*.wrk
Confidential
A-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Power Flow
Power Flow
A.9.2 Loads
PSS/U limits the number of loads at a node to four (each load category) and the number of
in-service sources in a network to one. In PSS/ADEPT, there is no limit on the number of loads at
a node or the number of in-service sources in a network.
Confidential
A-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
A.11 Sources
A.11.1 Source Angle
You have the ability to enter the value of the source angle on the Source Device Property sheet.
This value is not used by PSS/U and hence will not be written out to a PSS/U raw data file.
A-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
A-35
A-36
Confidential
Appendix B
PSS/U Input File Formats
B.1 PSS/U Raw Data File Format
PSS/ADEPT can import and export a PSS/U raw data file, the primary source of input to the PSS/U
application. The raw data file is a text file with the suffix .DAT and is read into PSS/ADEPT in free
format with data items separated by a comma or one or more spaces. Each network item is grouped
together and terminated by END/ section-name where section-name indicates the group section
(e.g., NODES, BRANCH, LOADS, etc.). Explanation of data items, data restrictions, and general
comments or rules about some categories are included below.
Confidential
0.10000
0.10000
0.10000
0.000
0.000
0.000
50.00
100.00
50.00
50.00
30.00
-0.500
0.00
10.00
B-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
CKTID
PKCUR
VFL
PTIME
Average fraction of time that load level specified within this data set is used for TOPO
(ignored)
REVNUM
Revision number is written into the file if the data is saved using the spreadsheet editor (it
is not necessary to add this number if you are creating a file from scratch)
SKVA
SKV
System standard base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in VFL
DEFSC
DEFPF
OHF*
OHR*
UGF*
UGR*
SWTIME*
SUBNAME*
Substation Name
B-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
NAME
KV
Node base voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data
BUSBAR
Length of busbar symbol in one-line diagram, in inches; a value of zero will not draw a
busbar symbol
V/H
Node name orientation; see Figure B-1 (N = 0 will not print node name)
IAR
DESC
-2
-1
- possible positions
- default position
-3
-4
Description
NAME
STATUS
source status
0 - out-of-service
1 - in-service
Confidential
B-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
R0
X0
KVS
Source open circuit voltage, kV; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data.
L, STAT, PHAS, CONST, DIST, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
END/ BRANCH
Description
TO node name
STAT
Line status
0 - open - disconnected at both ends
1 - in-service
PHAS
1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B)
CONST
DIST
Length
R1
X1
R0
X0
BC1
BC0
B-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
TO node name
STAT
Switch status
0 - open - disconnected at both ends
1 - in-service (closed)
PHAS
1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B)
CONST
ID
'blnk'
OPERST
Description
TO node name
TS
STAT
Switch status
0 - open - disconnected at both ends
1 - in-service (closed)
PHAS
1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B)
CONST
ID
CKTID
1 to 8 character identifier for the other circuit to which this tie switch is connected
OPERST
Confidential
B-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
END/ BRANCH
Description
TO node name
SX
STAT
PHAS
1 to 3 character string containing A, B, C or X, Y, Z as needed to indicate which phase conductors are present (e.g., ABC, XYZ, AC, B)
CONST
KVAT
R1
X1
R0
X0
B.1.6.5.1 Rules:
Transformer impedances must be specified in per unit on transformer kVA base, not on system kVA
base.
For a three-phase transformer, the impedance entered in this record will normally be the nameplate
value, which is normally given in per unit (or percent) with respect to the three-phase rating, and the
value of KVAT will normally be one third of the nameplate kVA rating.
For a single phase transformer, KVAT, R1, X1, R0, X0 will normally be the nameplate values.
A nonregulating transformer has a tstp0 (use the default) and a branch status (Section B.1.6) of 3
(taps locked).
Compensating impedance takes precedence over remote node regulation.
B-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
END/ BRANCH
Description
STAT
Transformer status
0 - transformer disconnected at primary and secondary
1 - transformer in service, taps adjusted independently in each phase
2 - transformer in service, taps in all phases in equal position, controlled by first phase
present (in ABC or XYZ order)
3 - transformer in service, taps locked in present position
PHAS
1 to 3 character string indicating which phases (A, B, C, or X, Y, Z) are present in the transformer bank; if the transformer is a wye-delta transformer (types + 2 and +3) define phasing
on wye side of the bank (refer to Section B.1.7 for the direction of the wye-delta connection with respect to the branch From and To node names)
CONST
KVAT
R1
X1
R0
X0
Description
Default
TYPE
Confidential
B-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
Default
TAP
1.0
TMAX
1.1
TMIN
.9
TSTP
VMAX
VMIN
1.05
1.04
RC
XC
0.0
0.0
REM
0.00625
B-8
Connection Type
Wye-wye
2
-2
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
3
-3
Delta-wye +30
Delta-wye -30
10
11
Delta-delta
12
13
14
15
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
To
From
Type 2 (-2)
Wye-Delta -30 (+30)
Type 1
Wye-Wye
Type 3 (-3)
Delta-Wye +30 (-30)
Type 11
Delta-Delta
Type 10
Delta-Connected Auto Regulator
Type 12
Wye-Connected Auto
Regulator
Confidential
B-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
(b)
where
Option (a) is used when DEFSC = 0. This case would be used when the actual P and Q loads are
known and entered in the load data records.
Option (b) is intended to be used in distribution feeder work where it is more convenient to specify
load in terms of connected load transformer capacity than in terms of actual load P and Q. The loads
applied to the feeder are determined by the above equations, the values of Pa, Pb, Pc are connected load transformer capacity (kVA), and the values of Qa, Qb, Qc are not used. The load
adjustment given above is applied to all loads by category where DEFSC 0, but not to machines.
The values specified for constant power, constant impedance, and constant current load are the
real and reactive powers consumed by the load, when the applied voltage is 1.0 per unit.
Load data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes at
which more than one type of load is connected. Balanced loads are divided equally among the
phases entering the node. Grounded loads are connected a-n, b-n, c-n. Ungrounded loads are connected a-b, b-c, c-a and placed in PA, PB, PC respectively.
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
G + jB
G + jB
G + jB
G + jB
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
B-10
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
P + jQ
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
MWh/month
Grounded
Ungrounded
Grounded
Ungrounded
MWh Loads
Type 5
15
25
35
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Balanced
Asynchronous Machines
Types 51 - 70, 151-170, load in kW, rating in kVA
Types 71 - 90, 171-190, load in hp, rating in hp
Synchronous Machines
Types 91 - 99, 191-199, load in kW, rating in kVA
END/ LOADS
Table B-12. kW, kvar Load - Unbalanced (types 1, 2, 3, 11, 12, 13)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories
KTYP
PA
QA
PB
QB
PC
QC
B.1.9.3.2 kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
NAME, KCAT, KTYP, PA, QA
END/ LOADS
Confidential
B-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Table B-13. kW, kvar Load - Balanced (types 21, 22, 23, 31, 32, 33)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories
KTYP
PA
QA
B.1.9.4.1 Rules
A negative load value designates the machine is a generator.
A machine may be placed out-of-service by setting its machine type to the negative of its type
number.
Machine data records may be entered in any order, with multiple records being entered for nodes
at which more than one type of machine is connected.
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories
KTYP
LOAD
Total real electrical power consumed by the machine in kW (types 51-70, 151-170, or total
mechanical power delivered by the machine in hp (types 71-90, 171-190)
RATING
Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA or nominal mechanical rating in hp depending
on type (defaults to SKVAM from Machine Dictionary)
KVNOM
Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter data,
start-up parameter file or activity OPTN (defaults to node base voltage)
B-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
NAME
Node name
KCAT
Load category code (1, 2, 3, or 4); see Section B.1.9.1, Load Categories
KTYP
LOAD
RATING
Nominal electrical rating of the machine in kVA (defaults to SKVAM from Machine
Dictionary)
KVNOM
Nominal voltage of machine; line-to-neutral assumed unless flag set in system parameter
data (defaults to node base voltage)
VSCHED
Scheduled terminal voltage to be held by machine voltage regulator, in per unit of base
voltage of node (defaults to Vs from Machine Dictionary)
QMAX
Maximum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMAX
from Machine Dictionary)
QMIN
Minimum reactive power output of the machine in per unit of RATING (defaults to QMIN
from Machine Dictionary)
END/ CONSUMER
Description
NAME
Node name
KTYP
LZ
LC
EA
CA
PFA
kWA
Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand)
EB
CB
PFB
kWB
EC
CC
PFC
KWC
Confidential
B-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
B.1.10.2 MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
NAME,KTYP, LZ, LC, EA, CA, PFA, KWA
END/ CONSUMER
Table B-17. MWh Load Data - Balanced (types 25, 26, 35, 36)
Data Item
Description
NAME
Node name
KTYP
LZ
LC
EA
CA
PFA
kWA
Phase A resultant kW after load converted (setting this value to zero will enable the program to calculate the equivalent peak load demand)
CB
PFB
kWB
CC
PFC
KWC
B-14
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
Default
NAME
Node name
TYPE
CVAR
STATUS
1.0
KVNOM
LOWR
0.95 pu
HIGHR
1.05 pu
REGN
Regulated node
Local node
STEP
Switching increment
1.0
PRIOR
Switching priority
Confidential
B-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Base kVA
where
TAB characters are not allowed - use spaces only. The last line in the file must be: END/.
X0, BC1,
X0, BC1,
X0, BC1,
A4
PSS, M,
!
!
!
!
!
BC0
BC0
BC0
S
The first line must always contain valid entries. For example, if a wire named 'LINE1' is a single
phase construction only, the construction file entry will read:
LINE10, R1, X1, R0, X0, BC1, BC0
Only the first line of a construction dictionary data record is required; all other lines (*2, *1, *, *R) are
optional.
Description
NAME
R1
X1
Positive-sequence resistance
R0
X0
Zero-sequence resistance
BC1
BC0
B-16
Positive-sequence reactance
Zero-sequence reactance
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
*2
R1,X1
R0,X0
Same as above
BC1,BC0
Description
*1
R1,X1
R0,X0
BC1,BC0
Same as above
Same as above
Description
A1
A2
Rating one
A3
A4
Rating three
Rating two
Rating four
Confidential
B-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Description
*R
RP
SWT
PSS
Two-phase (*2) and one-phase (*1) data records must precede rating (*) and reliability (*R) data
records.
B-18
Confidential
Appendix C
Validation Criteria
C.1 Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
Action in
Property Sheet
System
System base 0
Set to 100
Set to 7.2
Reject case
Set to H
N/A
N/A
Reject case
N/A
Reject case
Reject case
N/A
N/A
Reject case
Reject case
N/A
Nodes
Lines
Switches
Confidential
C-1
Validation Criteria
Data Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Action in
Property Sheet
Loads
Embedded spaces, commas, /, in name
N/A
Reject case
N/A
Reject case
N/A
Reject case
Reject case
Rating (kVA/phase) 0
Reject case
N/A
Sources
Series Capacitors/Reactors
Shunt Capacitors
Nominal voltage (kV) 0.
N/A
Reject case
Set to connected
node
Vmax 0
Set to 1.05
Vmin 0
Set to 0.95
Interchange
Single-phase size 0
Set to 1.05
Transformers
Set to 0.95
Interchange
Set to 1.10
Set to 0.90
Interchange
N/A
N/A
Reject case
N/A
Reject case
C-2
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Validation Criteria
Validation Criteria
Data Validation Criteria
Action in
Property Sheet
Reject case
Tap step 0
Set to 0.00625
Set to Tmax
Set to Tmin
Set to Tmax-Tmin
Reject case
N/A
Synchronous Machines
Rating (kVA) 0
Nominal voltage (kV) 0.
N/A
Reject case
Reject case
N/A
Interchange
ra < 0
Set to 0
Xd' < 0
Xd" < 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Interchange
Rating (kVA) 0
N/A
Reject case
Reject case
N/A
ra < 0
Set to 0
Xd' < 0
Xd" < 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Set to 0
Interchange
Confidential
C-3
Validation Criteria
User-Specified Network Validation Criteria
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
C-4
Confidential
Appendix D
Modeling
D.1 Nodes
Nodes are the connection points of a network (see Figure D-1). The connectivity of branch devices
(lines, cables, transformers, switches, etc.) are defined by a starting point (the FROM node) and an
ending point (the TO node). Similarly, shunt devices (loads, sources, machines, etc.) are situated
at nodes. There are two types of nodes within the Base Engine: single-phase nodes and
three-phase nodes. Internally, each three-phase node expands into three single-phase nodes, one
each for phases A, B, and C.
Single-Phase Node
Single Connection Point
A
B
Three-Phase Node
Connection Points for
Phases A, B, and C
C
98003
Confidential
D-1
Modeling
Sources
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.2 Sources
A source is generally used to supply (or remove) power to a network or to provide a reference
voltage. In some cases it serves as an idealized equivalent for a connecting network. There are both
three-phase and single-phase sources in the Base Engine. A particularly important type is the threephase swing source, which sets a voltage magnitude and angle reference for the system, and also
supplies/absorbs whatever power is needed to make power consumption and generation match in
the network. A swing source is so important that every network in the Base Engine must have a
swing source or a synchronous generator operating in the swing mode.
In a distribution system, a source is often used to represent the transmission system; doing this
removes the need to model the transmission itself. As an example, a source might be connected to
a distribution substation, with all the distribution feeders connected to the substation modeled in
detail. The source would represent the outside world, i.e., all the connections to the transmission
system.
D-2
R1 + jX1
R0 + jX0
Rg + jXg
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Sources
E
R1
X1
Positive Sequence
R1
X1
Negative Sequence
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Zero Sequence
98004
Confidential
D-3
Modeling
Sources
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D-4
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Loads
D.3 Loads
Loads are the consumers of power in an electric network. The Base Engine contains both
single-phase loads and three-phase loads. Either falls into one of three categories:
Constant-Current Load The power consumed by a constant-current load varies linearly with terminal voltage over the normal range of operating voltage. When voltage
increases, power consumed by the load increases; when voltage decreases, power
consumed by the load decreases.
Both the single-phase load and the three-phase load are shown in Figure D-4. Either may be connected line-to-line or line-to-ground. There is no restriction on the number of loads that can be
placed on a node.
Key to Symbols on Figure D-4:
P + jQ
Pa + jQa
Pb + jQb
Pc + jQc
The complex powers (kW, kvar) of a three-phase load at nominal voltage for
phases A, B, and C, respectively.
Rg + jXg
The complex grounding impedance of the load: the impedance, if any, that is
placed between the load neutral and ground (for wye-connected three-phase
loads).
Confidential
D-5
Modeling
Loads
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
P + jQ
P + jQ
Single-Phase Load
(Line-to-Ground)
Single-Phase Load
(Line-to-Line or Line-to-Neutral)
Pc + jQc
Pc + jQc
Pb + jQb
Pa + jQa
Pa + jQa
Pb + jQb
Rg + jXg
B
B
Three-Phase Load
(Delta)
Three-Phase Load
(Wye)
98006
D-6
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Shunt Capacitors
kvarc
kvarc
kvarb
kvara
Rg + jXg
kvara
kvarb
Three-Phase
Shunt Capacitor
(Delta)
Three-Phase
Shunt Capacitor
(Wye)
98007
Confidential
D-7
Modeling
Shunt Capacitor Controllers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D-8
Time delay, used if more than one device is controlling the voltage at a single node. For
example, if a transformer controller and a shunt capacitor controller are both regulating
the voltage at a particular node, and if the capacitor controller has a time delay of 0.0
and the transformer controller time delay is 1.0 (any number larger than 0.0) the capacitor controller will have command until the shunt capacitor reaches the limit setting. If
at that time the node voltage is still not within the specified range the transformer controller will take over. This example assumes that the two controllers were both trying to
hold the node voltage in the same range.
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
Confidential
D-9
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
PV
PQ
E will be adjusted so the machine draws the dictated real and reactive
power.
If a network were modeled that had a large number of generators in it, normally only one would be
set as the swing machine; the others would then run as type PV. Motors usually do not have the
capability to control their terminal voltage, and would be set as type PQ.
Key to Symbols:
D-10
R1 + jX1
R2 + jX2
R0 + jX0
Rg + jXg
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
Confidential
D-11
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
E
R1
X1
R2
X2
Ro + 3 R g
Xo + 3 X g
Positive Sequence
Negative Sequence
Zero Sequence
98008
D-12
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
Machine Number
Description of Machine
Confidential
D-13
Parameter
Xd
Xd
Machine 1
Machine 2
Machine 3
Machine 4
Machine 5
Description
.20 pu
.20
.20
.30
.10
.30 pu
.30
.30
.40
.16
2.0 pu
1.5
1.0
1.0
1.65
.21 pu
.20
.30
.60
.10
.30 pu
.50
.60
.60
.30
Xq
1.7 pu
1.4
.60
.60
1.6
ra
.002 pu
.003
.003
.003
.03
r2
.02 pu
.02
.03
.03
.35
X0
.05 pu
.09
.15
.15
.05
tdo
.035 s
.03
.035
.046
.05
7.0 s
6.0
6.0
6.0
7.0
Xd
Xq
Xq
tdo
tqo
.035 s
.08
.046
.11
tqo
1.5 s
.6
1.5
Sat1.0
.1 pu
.1
.2
.1
.1
.4 pu
.4
.6
.6
.3
4.0 s
4.0
3.0
3.0
6.0
rlr
.002 pu
.003
.003
.003
.03
Xlr
Rotor type
.20 pu
.2
.2
.3
.1
Round
Round
Salient
Salient
Round
Damper?
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Sat1.2
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
D-14
The machine parameters for each of the machines are shown in the table below.
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Synchronous Machines
Confidential
D-15
Modeling
Induction Machines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Slip (pu).
jX0
Ra + jXa
R1 + jX1
R2 + jX2
jXm
Ra + jXa
R2
+ j X2
s
R1
+ j X1
s
Positive
Sequence
jXm
Ra + jXa
R2
+ j X2
2-s
R1
+ j X1
s
Negative
Sequence
jXm
Ra + jX0
3(Rg + jXg)
Zero
Sequence
98010
D-16
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Induction Machines
Confidential
NEMA A
NEMA B
NEMA C
NEMA D
Ra
0.020
0.020
0.020
0.020
Xa
0.065
0.065
0.065
0.065
X0
0.030
0.030
0.030
0.030
Xm
3.400
3.400
3.400
3.000
R1
0.080
0.090
0.095
0.055
X1
0.057
0.025
0.050
0.045
R2
0.013
0.025
0.017
0.0
X2
0.100
0.031
0.031
0.0
D-17
Modeling
Lines
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.8 Lines
Lines (and cables) carry power over long distances (see Figure D-9). Both single-phase lines and
three-phase lines may be added to the network. A single-phase line is placed between two singlephase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. Similarly, a three-phase line is placed
between two three-phase nodes, one each at the FROM and TO ends of the line. The phases (A,
B, and/or C) actually present in a three-phase line are specified when the line is added to the network. Therefore, it is possible to construct three-phase lines that have conductors on one, two, or
all three phases.
FROM
Single-Phase
Node
Single-Phase Line
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Single-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with Three Phases
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with Two Phases
(Phase BC Shown)
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Three-Phase Line with One Phase
(Phase C Shown)
98011
D-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Switches
D.9 Switches
When closed, switches are a short circuit between two nodes of a network; when open, a switch
has no impact on currents and voltages (see Figure D-10). Three-phase switches may be defined
in the network. A three-phase switch joins two three-phase nodes.
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase ABC
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase AB
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase BC
Phase CA
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase A
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase B
98012
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase C
Confidential
D-19
Modeling
Transformers
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D.10 Transformers
Transformers consist of two or more magnetically coupled windings; the ratio of the number of turns
in the windings is the turns ratio(s) of the transformer. Transformers are used to raise or lower
voltage levels in a network, provide zero-sequence grounding, isolate sections of a network, and
regulate voltages. In PSS/Engines, two-winding transformers have two terminals, named FROM
and TO. Transformers have taps that change the winding ratio. Network voltages can be controlled
within a range by adjusting the transformer taps. Most transformers can be grounded through an
impedance on the FROM, TO, or both sides.
D-20
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformers
coupled. If both sides of the transformer are wye, or both sides are delta, as would be expected the
same winding exists on both sides.
When one side of the transformer is delta connected and the other wye connected the connection
depends on whether the TO side voltage leads or lags the FROM side voltage. As an example, consider the delta-wye transformer and the delta-wye -30 transformer. Both are transformers
connected delta on the FROM side and wye on the TO side. Suppose a delta-wye transformer is
created and "A" phasing is specified. This means that on the FROM side the winding is connected
from A to B. On the TO side the winding is connected from A to ground. If a delta-wye -30 transformer with "A" phasing is created, again the winding on the FROM side is connected from A to B.
However, to provide the required phase shift the TO side winding is connected B to ground. The
magnetic coupling polarity is also flipped, but this is done automatically and need not concern the
user.
Confidential
D-21
There are many transformers supported by PSS/Engines. The table below summarizes transformer types and indicates the availability of threephase, two-phase, and single-phase versions of the transformer. Each transformer type is described more fully in the sections that follow.
Transformer Type
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
The TO side is the series winding and normally the high voltage connection.
The FROM side connects to the common winding and normally is the low
voltage side.
Grounding impedance for the autotransformer is specified on the FROM side.
There is no grounding impedance on the TO side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Connected Autoregulator
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Connected Autoregulator
The TO side is the series winding, the FROM side connects to the common
winding. Usually connected with series winding on the source side and voltage
on the FROM side regulated.
Taps are on the TO side (the series winding).
The FROM side grounding impedance is used for the regulator ground.
Yes
Yes
Yes
The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding
center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the
FROM side.
The TO side is connected line-to-line (delta). Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only comes as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta/delta units in parallel,
resulting in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the
FROM side.
There is no grounding impedance on the TO side.
Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding
leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance.
Yes
No
No
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Wye-Connected Autotransformer
Modeling
Transformers
D-22
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
D-23
The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding
center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the
FROM side.
The TO side is connected line-to-ground (wye) through any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a +30 phase change across the
FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel resulting
in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side.
Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding
leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance.
Yes
No
No
The FROM side of the transformer is connected line-to-line with the winding
center point grounded through any grounding impedance specified on the
FROM side. The TO side is connected line-to-ground (inverted wye) through
any grounding impedance specified on the TO side. There is a -30 phase
change across the FROM side to the TO side. Tap changer is on the TO side.
Only available as a single-phase unit; three-phase unit can be constructed by
placing two single-phase or one two-phase delta-wye units in parallel, resulting
in a three-phase delta bank with one-winding center tapped on the FROM side.
Two impedance values are used to specify the transformer, the full winding
leakage impedance and the half-winding leakage impedance.
Yes
No
No
Delta-Wye -30
FROM side is an inverted-delta; TO side is a wye. Also represents a transformer with FROM side delta and TO side inverted-wye. There is a -30 phase
shift from the FROM side to the TO side of the transformer.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta +180
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Delta
FROM side is a delta; TO side is a delta. No phase shift across the transformer. There are no grounding impedances.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delta-Wye +30
FROM side is a delta; TO side is a wye. There is a +30 phase shift from the
FROM side to the TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance
on the FROM side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Modeling
Transformers
Center-Tapped Wye
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Transformer Type
Description
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Delta +30
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Delta -30
FROM side is a wye; TO side is a delta. There is a phase shift of -30 across
FROM to TO side of the transformer. There is grounding impedance on the TO
side.
Yes
Yes
Yes
Wye-Wye
Yes
Yes
Yes
Z-Wye -30
No
No
Yes
Z-Wye +30
No
No
Yes
Z-Wye -150
No
No
Yes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Wye-Wye +180
Modeling
Transformers
D-24
Transformer Type
Z-Wye +150
Description
FROM side is a zig-zag; TO side is a wye. Only comes as a three-phase unit.
A grounding impedance can be specified for the FROM side; there is no
grounding impedance on the TO side. Taps are on the TO side. The auxiliary
resistance and reactance are used to specify the transformer zero-sequence
Single
Phase
Two
Phase
Three
Phase
No
No
Yes
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
Transformer Type
D-25
Modeling
Transformers
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D-26
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
Confidential
D-27
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
It can be tricky to trace through the winding configuration to see the phase shift across the transformer. Sometimes drawing a phasor diagram helps. Or, in words, consider the voltage across
winding "A" on the FROM side. Since the winding is wye-connected the winding voltage is the
phase-to-ground voltage. Neglecting the turns ratio, the voltage across the "A" winding on the TO
side is the same as the winding voltage on the FROM side. However, the TO side winding is connected phase-to-phase, which leads the phase-to-ground voltage by 30. Therefore the phase-toground voltage on the TO side is 30 behind that on the FROM side. The preceding explanation
illustrates why a picture is worth a thousand words!
D-28
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
Physically, the wye-delta +30 is the same as the wye-delta; the difference is just some changes in
the labeling of the terminals. Shown below (Figure D-16) is a wye-delta +30 with phasing ABC; the
transformer is the same as the TRAN_YD above, except the labels of the B and C phases have
been flipped on the FROM and TO sides.
Notice that if the wye-delta +30 was specified with B phasing instead of ABC, the winding on the
FROM side would go from phase B to ground, the same as with the wye-delta. However, the TO
side winding would connect between phase A and B instead of B and C as for the wye-delta.
Confidential
D-29
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D-30
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
D.11.6 Autoregulators
The autoregulators, wye autoregulator and delta autoregulator are simply autotransformers with the
turns in the series winding a fraction of those in the common winding, for example 10%. The transformers are configured the same as the wye autotransformer, the FROM side connects to the
common winding and the TO side to the series winding. The taps are in the series winding, and the
tap mechanism can also flip the series winding back and forth between additive and subtractive
polarity (compared to the common winding). Usually the nodes on the FROM and TO side of the
regulator have the same nominal voltage. When the taps are set at 1.0 the transformer is a short
circuit (zero turns in the series winding).
These transformers usually have a current transformer (CT) and potential transformer (PT) in the
case with the transformer and tap changer, and operate with the voltage on the FROM side being
controlled. However, in PSS/Engines they can operate to control the voltage on either side.
The leakage impedance of the autoregulator is a function of the tap position; as already mentioned
with a tap setting of 1.0 the transformer is a short circuit. The maximum transformer impedance
occurs when all the turns of the series winding are in service, and actually is slightly different when
the series winding is in additive polarity compared to subtractive polarity. This leads to the situation
of what impedance should be specified when the transformer is added to the network, i.e., maximum, average, or what? This subject is discussed further later.
The wye autoregulator is essentially the same as the wye autotransformer and the user can refer
to Figure D-18 for the wye autotransformer. Any number of phases can be specified, there is no
phase shift across the transformer and any grounding impedance is specified on the FROM side.
The delta autoregulator is a little more complicated than the wye autoregulator. A diagram of an
delta autoregulator with ABC phasing is shown in Figure D-19.
Confidential
D-31
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Notice the tap mechanism in the series winding and also that the series winding can be flipped. The
transformer impedance varies with the tap; the user enters a characteristic impedance Zc; as
already mentioned there will be more discussion of this later. Either side can be the regulated side,
although commonly it is the FROM side. The regulator is connected lagging, the first phase of the
regulator (the only one that would be there if the regulator was specified with phase A) has the
common winding connected between the A and B terminals of the FROM side, and the other two
windings are connected with the same logic. At the present time, PSS/Engines does not have a regulator with a leading connection.
The delta autoregulator is obviously line-to-line connected, and PSS/Engines will automatically look
at the line-to-line voltage of the node at which the voltage is being regulated.
Delta-connected autoregulators are often connected with only two phases, called an open delta
configuration. However, the connection is not what would be obtained from the above drawn delta
autoregulator with phasing ABC if one of the phases were simply dropped. Instead the two phases
are connected with the common windings at the same neutral point. If the user specifies AB, BC or
CA phasing for the delta autoregulator, the transformer will be configured with the common neutral.
This is shown in Figure D-20. The drawing has been simplified; Zc is not shown. Notice that the
second winding has been flipped from what it was in the ABC phased regulator; this allows the B
phase to go directly through. The first regulator, operating between A and B is still lagging, but the
second regulator is operating leading. Similar transformers will be obtained if BC (C phase goes
straight through) or CA (A phase goes straight through) phasing is specified.
D-32
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
The average of the leakage impedance at maximum boost and the impedance at maximum buck.
The procedure below is used to calculate the "characteristic" impedance (R and X) for an
autoregulator.
MinTap
= Max
--------------------------------------2
For example, a transformer with 10% regulation:
MaxTap = 1.1
MinTap = 0.9
0.9- = 0.1
= 1.1
--------------------2
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is
given at maximum boost (maximum tap position).
(1 + )
= -------------------2
R = R np
X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is
given at maximum buck (minimum tap position)
(1 )
= -------------------2
R = R np
X = X np
Confidential
D-33
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
1
= ----2
R = R np
X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is
the average for all tap positions
or
If the condition under which the nameplate leakage
impedance (Rnp and Xnp) was obtained is unknown.
0.5
= -------------------------------------------------------1+
+ --------------- + 1n ------------
1
2
1
The characteristic resistance, R, and reactance,
X, needed for arguments 13 and 14 are:
R = R np
X = X np
If nameplate leakage impedance (Rnp and Xnp) is
unknown
(1 )
= -------------------2
R = 0.005
X = 0.040
D-34
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
Consider first the center-tapped delta, with the TO side connected delta (line-to-line) as shown in
Figure D-21.
Figure D-22. "A Phase" Center-Tapped Delta and "BC Phase" Delta-Delta
in Parallel to make a Three-Phase Bank
The FROM side of the center-tapped delta is connected to a three-phase node. As mentioned
before, in a three-phase system the ratio of line-to-line voltage to line-to-ground is 3. This transformer does not conform to that rule, and the nominal voltage on the FROM side must be specified
as the line-to-line voltage divided by 3. Therefore, in the 240/120 V example we have been discussing, the FROM side nominal voltage should be 138.6 V.
The center-tapped wye and center-tapped delta -30 transformers are similar to the center-tapped
delta. The difference is that on the TO side the winding is connected line-to-ground instead of lineto-line. A drawing of the center-tapped wye with A phasing is shown in Figure D-23. A grounding
impedance on the TO side can be specified for the center-tapped wye. Grounding impedances can
be used on both the FROM and TO sides.
Confidential
D-35
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
D-36
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Details
The interesting feature of the ZY transformers is that the zero-sequence impedance looking into the
TO (wye) side of the transformer is infinite. This is completely different than the usual behavior of a
Y connected set of windings. In fact, the zig-zag winding on the FROM side makes the wye winding
behave as if it were a delta winding.
A grounding impedance can be entered on the FROM side of the transformer. Since the zerosequence impedance looking into the TO side is already infinite, addition of a grounding impedance
would have no effect, and so is not allowed.
Figure D-25 shows a diagram of the Z-wye -30 transformer; the phase-to-ground voltage on the
TO (wye) side lags that on the FROM (zig-zag) side by 30. Perhaps the easiest way to see this is
to examine the A phase voltage on the FROM side. Ignoring turns ratios for the moment, notice it
is the sum of the A phase voltage on the TO side plus the negative of the B phase voltage on the
TO side. Drawing the phasor diagram shows that the A phase voltage on the FROM side leads the
A phase voltage on the TO side by 30.
Figure D-25. Z-Wye -30 Transformer with Voltage on the TO Side 30 Behind FROM Side
Confidential
D-37
Modeling
Transformer Details
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Wye
D-38
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Wye +180
Confidential
D-39
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Delta
D-40
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Delta +180
Confidential
D-41
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Delta
D-42
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye-Delta +30
Confidential
D-43
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Wye
D-44
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta-Wye -30
Confidential
D-45
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye
Autotransformer
D-46
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Wye
Autoregulator
Confidential
D-47
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
AB
Delta
Autoregulator
Center-Tapped
Delta
D-48
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Transformer
Modeling
Transformer Details
Phase
Drawing
ABC
Center-Tapped
Delta
and
Two-Phase
Delta-Delta
Center-Tapped
Wye
Center-Tapped
Delta -30
ABC
Z-Wye -30
Confidential
D-49
Modeling
Transformer Details
Transformer
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Phase
Drawing
ABC
Z-Wye +30
ABC
Z-Wye -150
ABC
Z-Wye +150
D-50
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Transformer Tap Controllers
Confidential
D-51
Modeling
Series Capacitor/Reactor
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
Phase AB
Phase ABC
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase CA
Phase BC
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase A
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase B
98023
FROM
Three-Phase
Node
TO
Three-Phase
Node
Phase C
D-52
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Faults
D.14 Faults
Three-phase faults are applied at three-phase nodes of a network. There are three types of
three-phase faults: (1) line-to-line faults, (2) line-to-ground faults, and (3) line-to-line-to-ground
faults.
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
C
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase AB
A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase CA
A
Zf
B
Phase B
Zf
Zf
B
Phase BC
A
Zf = Fault Impedance
B
Phase C
98024
Confidential
D-53
Modeling
Faults
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
B
Phase AB
B
Phase BC
Zf
B
Phase CA
A
Zf
Zf
Zf = Fault Impedance
Zf
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase B
B
Phase C
98025
D-54
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Modeling
Faults
Zf
Zf
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf
Zf
B
Phase ABC
B
Phase AB
B
Phase BC
Zf
Zg
Zf
B
Phase CA
Zf
Zg
Zg
Zf = fault impedance
Zg = grounding impedance
Zf
B
Phase A
Zf
Zf
B
Phase B
B
Phase C
98026
Confidential
D-55
D-56
Confidential
Appendix E
NEMA Machine Classes
Three-phase induction machines are modeled using a full two-circuit representation of the
machines rotor (see Figure E-1). This model describes the steady-state equivalent characteristics
of an induction machine. Electrical power consumed by an induction motor is represented by a positive r1,s and r2/s resistive number. Electrical power consumed by an induction generator is
represented by a negative r2/s number.
ra
Xa
r1/s
r2/s
X1
X2
Xm
98061-1
Confidential
E-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
ra
Xa
Xm
0.03
0.03
0.05
0.05
0.03
0.08
0.09
0.08
0.05
0.10
2.8
2.8
3.0
2.8
2.8
r1
0.015
0.025
0.04
0.115
0.01
X1
r2
0.11
0.11
0.18
0.05
0.15
0.07
0.15
0.10
0.06
X2
R1r
0.06
0.04
0.01
0.0*
0.0*
0.0565
0.0753
0.117
0.161
0.0461
X1r
0.126
0.149
0.120
0.104
0.175
0.15
*NEMA Type D machine has a single cage. The value 0.0 disables
the second cage.
E-2
Confidential
Appendix F
Device Properties Summary
F.1 Network
Table F-1. Network Properties: System
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Circuit ID
Circuit ID
Character
8-character maximum,
no embedded blanks,
not currently used
Blank
Real
number
0.0
Character
Line-to-line
Line-to-neutral
Line-to-neutral
Root node
Must be an existing
node in the network
System three-phase
base kVA
None
1000
System standard
base voltage (kV)
None
7.2 (LN)
System frequency
(Hz)
Real
number
None
60
Comments
Character
None
Blank
Confidential
F-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Substation name
Overhead failure
rate (failures/unit
length/yr)
Type
Default
8-character maximum, no
embedded blanks
Blank
None
0.0
Overhead repair
time (hr)
Real
number
None
0.0
Underground
failure rate
(failures/unit
length/yr)
Real
number
Applies to construction
types starting with UG
0.0
Underground
repair time (hr)
Real
number
Applies to construction
types starting with UG
0.0
Real
number
Applies to construction
types which indicate a
switch (zero impedance
line section)
0.0
F-2
Character
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.2 Nodes
Table F-3. Node Properties
Device
Property
Definition
Type
Default
Name
Base voltage
None
7.2
Description
Description
None
Blank
X position
x-coordinate of node on
the diagram
Real
number
None
x-coordinate of
drawn node
Y position
y-coordinate of node on
the diagram
Real
number
None
y-coordinate of
drawn node
Type
Busbar, point
Rotation
Label
configuration
List box
1 (first quadrant,
horizontal text)
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
Character
Restrictions
F-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.3 Lines/Cables
Table F-4. Lines/Cables Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
Phasing
Character
Line length
None
Construction type
Reference to construction
type in the construction dictionary file
Positivesequence
resistance
None
0.05
Positivesequence
reactance
Real
number
None
0.65
Zero-sequence
resistance
Zero-sequence resistance
specified in ohm/unit length
Real
number
None
0.1
Zero-sequence
reactance
Zero-sequence reactance
specified in ohm/unit length
Real
number
None
1.55
Positivesequence
charging
admittance
Positive-sequence charging
admittance specified in
S/unit length
Real
number
None
6.5
Zero-sequence
charging
admittance
Zero-sequence charging
admittance specified in
S/unit length
Real
number
None
4.0
Ratings (A)
Real
number
Up to a maximum of 4
Assigned from
ratings can be specified construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag
Check box
None
In Service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-4
Character
1.0
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.4 Transformers
Table F-5. Transformer Properties: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Phasing
Phasing of transformer
Character
ABC
Type
Transformer type
Character
Wye-wye
Wye-wye
Wye-delta -30
Wye-delta +30
Delta-wye -30
Delta-wye +30
Delta-connected auto
regulator
Delta-delta
Wye-connected auto
regulator
Center-tapped delta
Center-tapped wye
Wye-wye with phase shift
Wye-auto
Nameplate
Rating
Real
number
None
1000.0
Real
number
None
0.0
10-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Blank
Tapped node
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Specified TO
node
Real
number
0.008
Leakage
reactance (fullwinding
reactance)
Real
number
0.08
Half-winding
resistance
Half-winding resistance
specified in pu
Real
number
Must be >=0.0.
0.008
Half-winding
reactance
Half-winding reactance
specified pu
Real
number
0.08
Confidential
F-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
None
0.0
Real
number
None
0.0
TO grounding
resistance
None
0.0
TO grounding
reactance
None
0.0
Ratings (A)
Up to a maximum of 4
ratings can be specified
Assigned from
construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag
None
In Service
Visibility flag
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
None
Visible (checked)
F-6
Real
number
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Tap adjustment
Radio
buttons
Tap setting in
Phase A
Real
number
1.0
Tap setting in
Phase B
Real
number
1.0
Tap setting in
Phase C
Real
number
1.0
Maximum tap
setting
Real
number
None
1.1
Minimum tap
setting
Real
number
Tap step
Real
number
0.00625
TO side
Time delay
Must be > 0
Confidential
Real
number
F-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Max voltage
Min voltage
Regulated node
Tapped/Untapped
side
Compensating
resistance
Compensating resistance
specified in ohm
Real
number
None
0.0
Compensating
reactance
Compensating reactance
specified in ohm
Real
number
None
0.0
PT Ratio
Transformer PT Ratio
Real
number
None
CT Radio
Transformer CT Radio
Real
Number
None
Character
Must be an existing
node
None
Transformer side
None
TO side
F-8
1.05
Specified TO
node
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
Type
Load type
Character
Constant power.
Constant current.
Constant impedance.
Constant power
Balanced/
Unbalanced
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Groundedwye/delta
Grounded-wye
Delta
Grounded wye
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
None
kW = 200
kvar = 100
Grounding
resistance
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
None
0.0
In-service flag
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
kW = 300
kvar = 150
If a load is specified as balanced, only the total kW and kvar is specified. The application will
divide the load equally amongst the phases present. If a scale and power factor has been
specified in the Network Properties: Load Factors tab, the application will calculate the kvar based
on the kW entered and the specified scale and power factors.
Confidential
F-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
Type
Load type
Character
Constant power
Constant current
Constant impedance
Constant power
Balanced/
Unbalanced
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Groundedwye/delta
Grounded-wye
Delta
Grounded-wye
Phase A S (kVA)
None
111.803
Real
number
None
.894
Phase A pf
lead/lag
Check box
None
Lagging
Phase B S (kVA)
None
111.803
Phase B pf
Real
number
None
.894
Phase B pf
lead/lag
Check box
None
Lagging
Phase C S (kVA)
None
111.803
Phase C pf
Real
number
None
.894
Phase C pf
lead/lag
Check box
None
Lagging
In-service flag
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Total
Phase A pf
Total
F-10
335.410
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Category
Load category
Integer
number
1-4
Balanced/
unbalanced
Specified load as
balanced or unbalanced
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Unbalanced
Grounded-wye
delta
Load connected as
grounded (wye) or
ungrounded (delta)
Radio
button
Grounded-wye delta
Grounded-wye
Result display
Radio
button
Constant power
Constant impedance
Constant power
Seasonal
Check box
None
Non-seasonal
Concentrated at
the node
Check box
None
Concentrated at
the node
Percent constant
impedance
Real
number
None
0%
Phase A
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase A
Real
number
None
100
Phase B
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase B
Real
number
None
100
Phase C
MWh/month
MWh/month on Phase C
Real
number
None
100
Phase A number
of consumers
Number on consumers on
Phase A
Real
number
None
10
Phase B number
of consumers
Number on consumers on
Phase B
Real
number
None
10
Phase C number
of consumers
Number on consumers on
Phase C
Real
number
None
10
Phase A pf
Real
number
None
1.0
Phase B pf
Real
number
None
1.0
Phase C pf
Real
number
None
1.0
Resultant kW Phase A
Resultant kW - Phase A
Real
number
None
0.0
Resultant kW Phase B
Resultant kW - Phase B
Real
number
None
0.0
Resultant kW Phase C
Resultant kW - Phase C
Real
number
None
0.0
Confidential
F-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
In-service flag
None
In service
Visibility flag
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
None
Visible (checked)
F-12
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.7 Source
Table F-11. Source Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Name
Character
Scheduled
voltage (pu of
nominal)
Restrictions
Default
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
None
Node voltage
specified at the
source node
location in pu
Real
number
None
Source angle
Real
number
0.0
Positivesequence
resistance
None
0.0
Positivesequence
reactance
None
0.001
Zero-sequence
resistance
Zero-sequence source
thevenin resistance in pu
on the system kVA base
Real
number
None
0.0
Zero-sequence
reactance
Zero-sequence source
thevenin reactance in pu
on the system kVA base
Real
number
None
0.001
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance in
ohms of the source
Real
number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance in
ohms of the source
Real
number
None
0.0
In-service flag
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
F-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Restrictions
Default
Character
Real electrical
Total real electrical power
power at machine at machine terminal
input terminal
(kW)
Real
number
Real
number
Real
number
None
200
Rated (nominal)
terminal voltage
(kV)
Real
number
None
Nominal voltage
of the node
where the
machine is
located
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance
(ohms)
Real
number
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance
(ohms)
Real
number
None
0.0
In-service flag
Check box
None
In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible
(checked)
F-14
Type
100
100
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Check box
None
NEMA Type B
List box
AY
Locked rotor
resistance
None
0.0753
Locked rotor
reactance
Real
number
None
0.149
Armature
resistance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.03
Armature
reactance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.09
Magnetizing
reactance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
2.8
Inner cage
resistance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.025
Inner cage
reactance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.11
Outer cage
resistance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.15
Outer cage
reactance
Real
number
Noneditable if NEMA
type specified
0.04
Sub transient
reactance
0.119029
Transient
reactance
Transient reactance in pu
0.195841
NEMA
Restrictions
Real
number
Default
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
None
Real
number
None
0.01
Real
number
None
0.05
Real
number
1.0
Confidential
F-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character
maximum, no
embedded blanks
Machine type
Machine type
List box
Connection
Radio
button
N/A
Wye
Regulated node
List box
N/A
A negative load
value indicates a
generator.
500
Nominal machine
size
Real
number
None
Nominal machine
voltage
Real
number
None
Scheduled real
power consumed
Real
number
500.0
Scheduled
reactive power
consumed
-0.5
Scheduled
voltage
Scheduled terminal
Real
voltage to be held by the
number
machine voltage regulator
in pu of the node base
voltage
None
Scheduled
voltage angle
0.0
Max reactive
power
None
Min reactive
power
Real
number
None
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance of
the synchronous machine
Real
number
None
0.0
F-16
Real
number
Automatically assigned
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance of
the synchronous machine
In-service flag
Type
Default
None
0.0
Check box
Flag indicating whether
synchronous machine is in
or out of service
None
In service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
Real
number
Restrictions
F-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
List box
N/A
Rotor type
Round rotor
Salient Pole
List box
Round rotor
Machine has
damper winding
N\A
Cleck box
Not checked
Subtransient
reactance
Subtransient reactance in
pu
Real
number
0.2 D-axis
0.2 Q-axis
Transient
reactance
Transient reactance in pu
Real
number
0.3 D-axis
0.5 Q-axis
Synchronous
reactance
1.5 D-axis
1.4 Q-axis
Open circuit
subtransient
Real
number
0.03 D-axis
0.08 Q-axis
Open circuit
transient
6 D-axis
0.6 Q-axis
Armature
resistance
Machine resistance at
synchronous speed in pu
Real
number
.003
Negativesequence
resistance
Negative-sequence resistance in pu
Real
number
0.02
Locked rotor
resistance
Noneditable
.003
Locked rotor
reactance
Real
number
Noneditable
0.2
Zero-sequence
reactance
Zero-sequence reactance
of the machine in pu
Real
number
Noneditable
0.09
Grounding
resistance
Grounding resistance in
ohms
Real
number
Grounding
reactance
Grounding reactance in
ohms
Real
number
Saturation
coefficient
Saturation coefficient at
1.0 pu and 1.2 pu
Real
number
0.1 at 1.0 pu
0.4 at 1.2 pu
Inertia constant
Real
number
F-18
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
None
No auto transformer
connected
Real
number
Non-editable
Real
number
Non-editable
Real
number
Confidential
F-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Unique name identifier
Type
Restrictions
Default
Character
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Real
number
None
Nominal voltage
of the node
where the
machine is
located
Reactive power
capacity
None
100
300 total
Type
Radio
button
Fixed
Switched
Fixed
Connection
Radio
button
Delta
Wye
Wye
Balance
Balanced or unbalanced
capacitor bank
Radio
button
Balanced
Unbalanced
Balanced
Real
number
Real
number
Regulated node
Switching
increment
Real
number
1.0
Switching priority
Integer
number
Fraction switched
in
1.0
Ungrounded
None
Grounded (not
checked)
Grounding
resistance
None
0.0
Grounding
reactance
None
0.0
F-20
Check box
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Time delay
Must be > 0
In-service flag
In service
Visibility flag
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
None
Visible
(checked)
Confidential
Check box
Check box
F-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.11 Switches
Table F-19. Switch Properties
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Automatically
assigned
Phasing
Phasing of switch
Character
ABC
Switch ID
Character
3-character maximum,
no embedded blanks.
Not currently used, provided for raw data file
compatibility
Blank
Construction type
Reference to construction
type in the construction
dictionary file
Character
10-character maximum,
no embedded blanks.
Not currently used, provided for raw data file
compatibility.
Blank
Ratings (A)
Real
number
Up to a maximum of 4
ratings can be specified
Check box
A normal switch
(unchecked).
Character
8-character maximum,
no embedded blanks.
Not currently used, provided for raw data file
compatibility. Used only
when a tie switch is
specified.
0.95
Status
Radio
button
Open
Closed
Closed
TOPO status
Specifies whether
Radio
switches are allowed to
button
freely open or close during
TOPO analysis
Locked
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-22
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Name
Phasing
Phasing of transformer
Type
Character
Restrictions
12-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Default
Automatically
assigned
Character
Real
number
None
333.33
Construction type
Reference to construction
type in the construction
dictionary file
Character
10-character maximum,
no embedded blanks
Blank
Positivesequence
resistance
Real
number
None
0.0
Positivesequence
reactance
Real
number
-0.005
Zero-sequence
resistance
Real
number
None
0.0
Zero-sequence
reactance
Zero-sequence reactance
specified in pu
Real
number
-0.005
Ratings (A)
Real
number
Up to a maximum of 4
ratings can be specified
Assigned from
construction dictionary or default
properties
In-service flag
Check box
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Confidential
F-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Automatically
assigned
Type
Fault type
List box
selection
Three-phase-to-ground
Phase-to-ground
Phase-to-ground
through an impedance
Phase-to-phase
Phase-to-phase-toground
Ungrounded
three-phase
Three-phase-toground
Phasing
List box
selection
In-service flag
Check box
None
In Service
Visibility flag
Check box
None
Visible
Results visibility
flag
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
F-24
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Automatically
assigned
Description
None
Blank
Branch
Character
Noneditable
Location
Character
Noneditable
Selected device
list
Available device
list
List box
List containing available
devices that are currently
in the equipment database
Sort fields
List box
List box
Visibility flag
Check box
Confidential
Blank
None
Visible
F-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.15 Fuses
Table F-23. Fuses: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Branch
Character
Noneditable
Real
Number
None
1.0
Check box
None
Description
Character
None
Manufacturer,
model rating
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Definition
Plot color
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-26
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Name
Character
None
Branch
Character
Noneditable
Phasing
List box
Description
Character
Time dial
List or
slider
control
Pickup
List or
slider
control
Instantaneous
Instantaneous setting
List or
slider
control
Primary Ct
Ct setting - primary
Secondary Ct
Instantaneous
operation time
Default
Max-phase
None
Manufacturer,
model, time char,
available tap
settings
Real
number
None
100
Ct setting - secondary
Real
number
None
5.0
Real
number
Must be > 0
0.02
Check box
Not checked
Instantaneous
setting specified in
Amps
Disable flag
Check box
Not checked
(enabled)
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Plot color
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-28
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Transformer damage
curve name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Character
None
kVA rating,
category
3 Phase Rating
(kVA)
Nameplate rating
Real
number
None
Inrushmultiplier
flag
Real
number
None
ANSI factor
Real
number
None
Phasing
Transformer phasing
List box
None
Phasing of the
transformer branch
or <ABC>
Transformer
impedance (R1,
X1, R0, X0)
None
Impedance of the
transformer branch
or R1 = 0.01, X1 =
0.057, R0 = 0.01,
X0 = .057
Real
number
None
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-29
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Plot color
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-30
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Character
None
Blank
Type
Conductor type
Radio box
Overhead conductor
cable
Overhead
conductor
English, metric
English
Units
Radio box
Conductor area
List box
User defined
I/O AWG
unchecked, not
user defined
Real
number
None
Material
Conductor material
List box
ACSR (singlestrand)
Insulation type
Insulation type
List box
Bare
Real
number
None
Minimum conductor
temperature
Real
number
None
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-31
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Plot color
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
F-32
Color
window
Restrictions
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.19 Reclosers
Table F-31. Reclosers: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Recloser name
Character
None
Blank
Description
None
Manufacturer, type,
nominal voltage
Nom voltage
Nominal voltage
Character
Not editable
Number
Not editable
Curve annotation
Curve annotation
specification
Radio box
N/A
List box
N/A
Minimum trip
rating
List box
N/A
Total clearing
List box
N/A
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Definition
Plot color
Current multiple
Type
Default
Color palette
Red
None
1.0
Time multiple
Real
number
None
1.0
Time adder
Real
number
None
0.0
Confidential
Color
window
Restrictions
F-33
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
F.20 Machines
Table F-33. Machines: General
Device Property
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Name
Machine name
Character
None
Blank
Description
Character
None
Blank
Mechanical
Power Units
None
hp
Mechanical
Rating
Rating of machine in
either hp or kW
Number
None
Machine rating if
present at PEPack
location <or> 200
Rated (nominal)
terminal voltage
(kV)
Number
None
Machine kV if
present at PEPack
location <or> Node
kV where machine
is located
Power factor
Number
None
Machine power
factor if present at
PEPack location
<or> 1.000
Efficiency
Machine efficiency
Number
None
Machine efficiency
if present at
PEPack location
<or> 1.000
Full Load
Number
None
Calculated based
on efficiency,
rating, kV and
power factor if not
user defined. If
user-defined is
checked, enter the
value of the full load
amps
Locked rotor
Number
None
Calculated as 6
times full load. If
user-defined is
checked, enter the
value of locked
rotor current.
Acceleration time
None
10.0
Machine Starting
Characteristics
None
Full voltage
Transformer
position
1.0
F-34
Number
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Definition
Type
Restrictions
Default
Visible
Indicator specifying
whether to show device
curve on plot
Check box
None
Visible (checked)
Disabled
Check box
None
Un-checked
(enable operating
time calculations)
Confidential
F-35
F-36
Confidential
Appendix G
Database Field Formats
G.1 Branch Results
G.1.1 Filename: branch.dbf
Table G-1. Branch Results
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NAME
Character
12
Device name
TYPE
Character
12
Device type
LIBRARY
Character
12
Library reference
NODE1
Character
12
NODE2
Character
12
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
VBASE
Number
18
Base voltage
RATING
Number
IA
Number
18
Phase A current
IB
Number
18
Phase B current
IC
Number
18
Phase C current
IMAX
Number
18
Maximum current
TA
Number
12
Phase A angle
TB
Number
12
Phase B angle
TC
Number
12
Phase C angle
I0
Number
18
Zero-sequence current
I1
Number
18
Positive-sequence current
I2
Number
18
Negative-sequence current
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-1
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
Positive-sequence angle
T2
Number
12
Negative-sequence angle
PA
Number
18
PB
Number
18
PC
Number
18
PLOSS
Number
18
SA
Number
18
SB
Number
18
SC
Number
18
QA
Number
18
QB
Number
18
QC
Number
18
QLOSS
Number
18
PFA
Number
18
PFB
Number
18
PFC
Number
18
LLA
Character
LLB
Character
LLC
Character
TNODE
Character
10
RNODE
Character
10
XTYPE
Character
10
Transformer type
TAPA
Number
TAPB
Number
TAPC
Number
VREGA
Number
18
VREGB
Number
18
VREGC
Number
18
LENGTH
Number
18
Line length
PCOST
Number
Name
G-2
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
QCOST
Number
IUNBALPERC
Number
18
Percent unbalance
IAVG
Number
18
Average current
VA
Number
18
VB
Number
18
VC
Number
18
Vmin
Number
18
Minimum voltage
Dist
Number
18
Total P
Number
18
Total Q
Number
18
Total S
Number
18
Total PF
Number
18
Total L
Number
18
Nodeph
Character
Name
Confidential
Description
G-3
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
CON
Character
TYPE
Character
10
PLOSS0
Number
18
QLOSS0
Number
18
PLOSS1
Number
18
QLOSS1
Number
18
PVCOSTFX
Number
18
PVCOSTSW
Number
18
PV0
Number
18
PV1
Number
18
Name
ISLAND
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Character
12
Node name
SIZE
Number
18
TYPE
Character
Name
NODE
G-4
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PROFILE
Character
20
NODE
Character
20
Node name
SIZE
Number
18
STEP
Number
18
FRACTION
Number
18
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
TYPE
Character
Type (fixed/switched)
CVAR
Number
18
CVARA
Number
18
CVARB
Number
18
CVARC
Number
18
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KVNOM
Number
18
LOW
Number
18
HIGH
Number
18
STEP
Number
18
PRIOR
Number
18
Switching priority
Name
Confidential
Description
G-5
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
CON
Character
12
Connection (delta/wye)
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
Number
12
Time delay
Name
TIMEDELAY
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
18
Group name
DESC
Character
250
Group description
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
OVER
Number
UNDER
Number
OUT
Number
BRANCH
Number
Name
G-6
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island number
NODE
Character
12
Faulted node
PHS
Character
12
VBASE
Number
18
3PH_G
Number
18
PH_G
Number
18
PH_GZ
Number
18
PH_PH
Number
18
PH_PH_G
Number
18
3PH
Number
18
RP
Number
18
XP
Number
18
R0
Number
18
Zero-sequence resistance
X0
Number
18
Zero-sequence reactance
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-7
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LOAD
Number
18
Load
RATING
Number
18
Rating
KCAT
Number
18
Category
KTYP
Number
18
Type
KVNOM
Number
18
Nominal KV
NEMA
Character
NEMA identification
START
Character
Start (Y/N)
AUTOX
Character
RLR
Number
18
XLR
Number
18
RT
Number
18
XT
Number
18
TAP
Number
18
EFF
Number
18
Machine efficiency
RA
Number
18
Armature resistance
XA
Number
18
Armature reactance
MAGX
Number
18
Magnetizing Reactance
INR
Number
18
INX
Number
18
OUTR
Number
18
OUTX
Number
18
SUBX
Number
18
Subtransient reactance
TRX
Number
18
Transient reactance
Name
G-8
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
LUNITS
Character
RUNITS
Character
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
Number
18
Length
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
X1
Number
18
R0
Number
18
X0
Number
18
BC1
Number
18
BC0
Number
18
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (amps)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (amps)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (amps)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (amps)
Name
DIST
Confidential
Description
G-9
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
SRCKW
Number
18
SRCKVAR
Number
18
SYNKWP
Number
18
SYNKWN
Number
18
SYNKVARP
Number
18
SYNKVARN
Number
18
INDKWP
Number
18
INDKWN
Number
18
INDKVARP
Number
18
INDKVARN
Number
18
CAPKVAR
Number
18
NCAPS
Number
Number of capacitors
NSRCS
Number
Number of sources
NLINES
Number
Number of lines
NSYNP
Number
NINDP
Number
NSYNN
Number
NINDN
Number
LOSSKW
Number
18
LOSSKVAR
Number
18
Name
G-10
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KCAT
Number
Category
KTYP
Character
Type
GRND
Character
Grounded (Y/N)
BAL
Character
Balanced (Y/N)
CON
Character
Construction (delta/wye)
PA
Number
18
QA
Number
18
PB
Number
18
QB
Number
18
PC
Number
18
QC
Number
18
SA
Number
18
PFA
Number
18
Character
SB
Number
18
PFB
Number
18
Character
SC
Number
18
PFC
Number
18
Character
Name
LEADA
LEADB
LEADC
Description
Confidential
G-11
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
18
Snapshot name
CAT
Character
18
Load category
FACTOR
Number
18
Scale factor
TIME
Number
18
Duration (pu)
ACTIVE
Character
10
Active (Y/N)
TYPE
Character
10
Type (machine/load)
SCALE
Character
10
Scale (pwr/size)
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PPRICE
Number
QPRICE
Number
PDPRICE
Number
QDPRICE
Number
DISCOUNT
Number
INFLATION
Number
PERIOD
Number
FINSTCOST
Number
SINSTCOST
Number
FMAINTCOST
Number
SMAINTCOST
Number
Name
G-12
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
PHASE
Character
Device phases
STATUS
Character
Device status
KV
Number
18
IAR
Number
Area number
Number
12
Name
Description
Section B.1.4
DESC
Character
250
Description
FIXED
Character
SWITCHED
Character
Number
18
Graphical x-coordinate
Number
18
Graphical y-coordinate
Character
ORIENT
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
AREA
Number
Area
VBASE
Number
18
VA
Number
18
Voltage phase A
VB
Number
18
Voltage phase B
Name
ISLAND
Confidential
Description
G-13
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
VC
Number
18
Voltage phase C
TA
Number
12
Angle phase A
TB
Number
12
Angle phase B
TC
Number
12
Angle phase C
V0
Number
18
Zero-sequence voltage
V1
Number
18
Positive-sequence voltage
V2
Number
18
Negative-sequence voltage
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
Positive-sequence angle
T2
Number
12
Negative-sequence angle
VPREA
Number
18
VPREB
Number
18
VPREC
Number
18
VPOSTA
Number
18
VPOSTB
Number
18
VPOSTC
Number
18
VDIFFA
Number
18
VDIFFB
Number
18
VDIFFC
Number
18
Vmin
Number
18
Minimum voltage
Vmax
Number
18
Maximum voltage
Vavg
Number
18
Average voltage
VUNBALPERC
Number
18
Percent unbalance
DISTANCE
Number
18
Name
G-14
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
X1
Number
18
R0
Number
18
X0
Number
18
BC1
Number
18
BC0
Number
18
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (pu)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (pu)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (pu)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (pu)
KVAT
Number
18
Name
Confidential
Description
G-15
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
AREA
Number
Area
CON
Character
Connection (delta/wye)
TYPE
Character
12
Number
Category
PHASE
Character
Valid phase
VBASE
Number
18
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
CAP
Character
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
USED
Number
Capacitor pu used
STEP
Number
SIZE
Number
18
Size
QMAX
Number
18
QMIN
Number
18
MACH
Character
Machine type
VSCHED
Number
18
Schedule voltage
PSCHED
Number
18
Schedule power
VTERM
Number
18
Terminal voltage
VOP
Number
18
Operating voltage
SLIP
Number
18
Machine slip
FAULT
Number
18
Fault type
RFAULT
Number
18
Fault resistance
XFAULT
Number
18
Fault reactance
IA
Number
18
Phase A current
IB
Number
18
Phase B current
Name
ISLAND
CAT
G-16
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
IC
Number
18
Phase C current
TA
Number
12
Phase A angle
TB
Number
12
Phase B angle
TC
Number
12
Phase C angle
I0
Number
18
Zero-sequence current
I1
Number
18
Positive-sequence current
I2
Number
18
Negative-sequence current
T0
Number
12
Zero-sequence angle
T1
Number
12
Positive-sequence angle
T2
Number
12
Negative-sequence angle
PA
Number
18
PB
Number
18
PC
Number
18
SA
Number
18
SB
Number
18
SC
Number
18
PFA
Number
PFB
Number
PFC
Number
PF
Number
Power factor
LLA
Character
Phase A lead/lag
LLB
Character
Phase B lead/lag
LLC
Character
Phase C lead/lag
QA
Number
18
QB
Number
18
QC
Number
18
VREGA
Number
18
VREGB
Number
18
VREGC
Number
18
TIMEDELAY
Number
18
Character
Name
RUNITS
Confidential
Description
G-17
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
TYPE
Character
12
Source type
kVA
Number
18
SRP
Number
18
QMAX
Number
18
QMIN
Number
18
R1
Number
18
X1
Number
18
R0
Number
18
X0
Number
18
RG
Number
18
XG
Number
18
ANGLE
Number
18
Source angle
KVS
Number
18
Source voltage
Name
G-18
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Fault name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
TYPE
Character
10
Type
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
CAT
Character
30
Category
NKW
Number
18
Nominal kW
NKVAR
Number
18
Nominal kvar
NKVA
Number
18
Nominal kVA
NPF
Number
18
Character
AKW
Number
18
Actual kw
AKVAR
Number
18
Actual kvar
AKVA
Number
18
Actual kVA
APF
Number
18
Character
Name
NLEAD
ALEAD
Confidential
Description
G-19
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
KWACONSTP
Number
18
KWBCONSTP
Number
18
KWCCONSTP
Number
18
KVARACONP
Number
18
KVARBCONP
Number
18
KVARCCONP
Number
18
KWACONSTZ
Number
18
KWBCONSTZ
Number
18
KWCCONSTZ
Number
18
KVARACONZ
Number
18
KVARBCONZ
Number
18
KVARCCONZ
Number
18
Name
G-20
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
TO
Character
12
TO node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
12
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
0.0
X1
Number
18
0.0
R0
Number
18
0.0
X0
Number
18
0.0
BC1
Number
18
0.0
BC0
Number
18
0.0
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (amps)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (amps)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (amps)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (amps)
TYPE
Character
Type (normal/tie)
ID
Character
12
Device ID
CKTID
Character
12
Circuit ID
TOPO
Character
Name
Confidential
Description
G-21
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
NODE
Character
12
Connected node
REGNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
PHASE
Character
Valid phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
CONNECT
Character
12
Delta or Wye
LOAD
Number
18
Load (kW)
RATING
Number
18
Rating
KCAT
Number
18
Category
KTYP
Number
18
Type
AUTOX
Character
KVNOM
Number
18
Nominal kV
VSCHEDA
Number
18
VSCHEDB
Number
18
VSCHEDC
Number
18
SCHEDQ
Number
18
QMAX
Number
18
QMIN
Number
18
TAP
Number
18
Name
G-22
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
ISLANDS
Number
Number of islands
NODES
Number
Number of nodes
BRANCHES
Number
Number of branches
SHUNTS
Number
Number of shunts
FAULTS
Number
Number of faults
LOOPS
Number
Number of loops
SOURCES
Number
Number of sources
TRANS
Number
Number of transformers
LINES
Number
Number of lines
SWITCHES
Number
Number of switches
SERCAPS
Number
SMACHS
Number
IMACHS
Number
LOADS
Number
Number of loads
CAPS
Number
Number of capacitors
DIST
Number
Name
Confidential
Description
G-23
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Number
Island
NAME
Character
12
Device name
UPSTREAM
Character
12
Upstream node
DOWNSTREAM
Character
12
Downstream node
STATUS
Character
Status (open/closed)
CHANGED
Character
ID
Character
12
Device ID
PLOSS0
Number
18
QLOSS0
Number
18
PLOSS1
Number
18
QLOSS1
Number
18
EPCOST0
Number
18
EQCOST0
Number
18
DPCOST0
Number
18
DQCOST0
Number
18
EPCOST1
Number
18
EQCOST1
Number
18
DPCOST1
Number
18
DQCOST1
Number
18
Name
ISLAND
G-24
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
TITLE1
Character
132
Line 1 of title
TITLE2
Character
132
Line 2 of title
COMMENT1
Character
132
Line 1 of comments
COMMENT2
Character
132
Line 2 of comments
COMMENT3
Character
132
Line 3 of comments
COMMENT4
Character
132
Line 4 of comments
COMMENT5
Character
132
Line 5 of comments
Name
Description
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
NAME
Character
12
Device name
FROM
Character
12
FROM node
FRPHASE
Character
FROM phases
TO
Character
12
TO node
TOPHASE
Character
TO phases
STATUS
Character
Status (in/out)
LIB
Character
12
Library reference
R1
Number
18
X1
Number
18
R0
Number
18
X0
Number
18
Name
Confidential
Description
G-25
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
BC1
Number
18
BC0
Number
18
A1
Number
18
Rating 1 (pu)
A2
Number
18
Rating 2 (pu)
A3
Number
18
Rating 3 (pu)
A4
Number
18
Rating 4 (pu)
TYPE
Character
18
Transformer type
REMLOC
Character
18
KVAT
Number
18
TAP1
Number
18
TAP2
Number
18
TAP3
Number
18
Character
FROM or TO
TMAX
Number
18
TMIN
Number
18
STEP
Number
18
Tap step
VMAX
Number
18
Maximum voltage
VMIN
Number
18
Minimum voltage
RCA
Number
18
XCA
Number
18
RCB
Number
18
XCB
Number
18
RCC
Number
18
XCC
Number
18
PTA
Number
18
pt ratio phase A
CTA
Number
18
ct rating phase A
PTB
Number
18
pt ratio phase B
CTB
Number
18
ct rating phase B
PTC
Number
18
pt ratio phase C
CTC
Number
18
ct rating phase C
TNODE
Character
12
Tapped node
RNODE
Character
12
Regulated node
Name
TAPSIDE
G-26
Description
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
TIMEDELAY
Number
18
Time delay
PHASESHIFT
Number
18
FRVOLT
Number
18
TOVOLT
Number
18
TO voltage (kV)
FRGR
Number
18
FRGX
Number
18
TOGR
Number
18
TO grounding resistance
TOGX
Number
18
TO grounding reactance
Character
Yes or No
Name
USERDEF
Confidential
Description
G-27
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Name
KV
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
Character
10
Description
Voltage in KV
Type
Maximum
Width
Maximum
Number of
Decimals
PD
Character
20
NAME
Character
20
Associated branch
CS
Number
12
Customer count
CI
Number
12
Customer interruptions
SAIFI
Number
12
SAIDI
Number
12
CAIFI
Number
12
CAIDI
Number
12
Name
G-28
Description
Confidential
Appendix H
Conductor Database
Column Heading
Description
NAME
!-!--
Conductor Name.
TYPE
---
Conductor Type.
R_DC
-(ohm/mi)
R_DC
-(ohm/km)
R_AC60
60 Hz
(ohm/mi)
R_AC60
60 Hz
(ohm/km)
R_AC50
50 Hz
(ohm/mi)
R_AC50
50 Hz
(ohm/km)
XL_60
60 Hz
(ohm/mi)
XL_60
60 Hz
(ohm/km)
XL_50
50 Hz
(ohm/mi)
XL_50
50 Hz
(ohm/km)
Confidential
H-1
Conductor Database
Column Heading
Description
XC_60
60 Hz
(mohm-mi)
XC_60
60 Hz
(mohm-km)
XC_50
50 Hz
(mohm-mi)
XC_50
50 Hz
(mohm-km)
AREA
Aluminum
(kcmil)
AREA
Total
(sq-in.)
AREA
Total
(sq-mm)
OD
-(in.)
OD
-(mm)
STRAND
outer/core
--
#STD-OL
outer
--
STR-DIA
outer
(in.)
STR-DIA
outer
(mm)
STR-DIA
core
(in.)
STR-DIA
core
(mm)
UTS
-(lb)
H-2
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Confidential
PSS/APEPT-5
Users Manual
Column Heading
UTS
-(kg)
WGT
-(lb/1000 ft)
WGT
-(kg/km)
Amps
-(A)
Confidential
Conductor Database
Description
Rated breaking strength of the conductor (kg).
Ampacity based on 40oC conductor temperature rise over a 40oC ambient temperature with a 2ft/sec crosswind, 0.5 emissivity and no sun.
H-3
H-4
Confidential
Index
A
acceleration factors A-33
adding a branch 2-6
adding a shunt 2-5
adding items to a group 2-9
adding items to a load category 2-12
adding nodes 2-4
analysis conventions 4-2
phases 4-2
analysis options
CAPO 4-39
general 4-5
load flow 4-15
motor starting 4-33
short circuit 4-26
TOPO 4-45
B
branches
adding 2-6
copying 3-33
deleting 3-33
moving 3-32
C
cable/conductor damage curves
editing 7-18
capacitor
changing properties 3-81
properties F-20
user-specified validation criteria C-4
CAPO result options 4-14
changing properties 2-2
color coding 1-33, 4-7
branches under power factor limit 4-8
by group 4-7
items by category 4-8
nodes by calculated voltage 4-7
nodes by nominal voltage 4-7
overloaded branches 4-7
unbalanced nodes, branches 4-8
compensating impedance 3-46
conductor/cable damage
Confidential
properties F-31
construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29, A-31
construction dictionary formats
basic data record B-16
one-phase data records B-17
rating data record B-17
reliability data record B-17
two-phase data records B-17
coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30
coordination view
annotation 7-29
list 7-30
menu bar 7-29
printing 7-31
settings 7-29
corridor files 6-21
adjusting circuit properties 6-26
analyzing 6-28
automatic validation 6-28
calculation results 6-32
copying a circuit 6-26
deleting a circuit 6-27
deleting all circuits 6-28
modifying 6-25
pasting a circuit 6-27
selecting a curcuit 6-25
user-initiated validation 6-29
creating a diagram 2-1
creating a network 2-1
D
defining a group 2-8
defining economics 2-14
defining item ordering method 2-15
defining load categories 2-11
deleting a group 2-10
deleting a load category 2-13
deselecting items
all 3-19
device database interface
adding fuses 7-42
adding reclosers 7-44
adding relays 7-43
modifying fuses 7-45
IX-1
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
F
fault all result options 4-11
nodes 4-11
filters
selecting 3-24
flat transformers 1-25
flow arrows 4-8
fuses
edting 7-11
properties F-26
G
getting help 1-2
grid editor 3-2
copy/paste 3-7
exporting data 3-8
finding data 3-8
formatting 3-9
modifying network items 3-4
opening 3-3
printing 3-11
zooming 3-14
groups A-34
adding items 2-9
defining 2-8
deleting 2-10
selecting 3-19
viewing 2-9
H
harmonic analysis 8-1
adding harmonic injections 8-2
analysis options 8-10
editing harmonic filters 8-8
editing harmonic injections 8-6
harmonic filters 8-7
harmonic models 8-18
nodes 8-5
shunt items 8-3
transformers 8-4
viewing results 8-12
help
online 1-3
technical support 1-3
economics A-34
defining 2-14
editing 7-3
IX-2
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
K
knee points 2-32
L
labels 2-34
branch results 2-38
fonts 2-36
point nodes 2-37
result visibility 2-37
layers 2-29
limits
loads A-33
network size A-33
number loops A-33
power factor 4-54
line properties calculator 6-1
corridor view 6-46-5
menu bar 6-12
saving impedances 6-40
setting options 6-14
status bar 6-12
toolbar 6-13
lines
changing properties 3-34
properties F-4
user-specified validation criteria C-4
links 2-39
load categories A-34
adding items 2-12
defining 2-11
Confidential
Index
deleting 2-13
selecting 3-21
viewing 2-12
load flow and short circuit result options 4-9
all 4-11
branches 4-10
branches and shunts 4-11
nodes 4-9
shunts 4-10
load flow solutions
constant current load 4-24
constant impedance load 4-24
constant power load 4-23
induction machines 4-23
lines and cables 4-20
machine modeling 4-21
network representation 4-20
sources 4-20
static load modeling 4-23
synchronous machines 4-21, A-14
transformers 4-21
load snapshots A-34
creating 3-102
loads
automatic validation criteria C-2
locking the diagram 2-34
M
machine protection
edting 7-24
properties F-34
main menu
analysis 1-18
help 1-18
network 1-17
using 1-17
view 1-17
window 1-18
menus
file 1-17
main 1-17
merging files 1-40
motor starting result options 4-11
motor starting solutions
auto-transformer starting 4-35
machines being started 4-35, A-16
running machines 4-35
sources 4-35
MWh load
changing properties 3-60
properties F-11
MWh loads A-34
IX-3
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
N
name identifiers A-33
navigating the diagram 2-28
network
automatic validation criteria C-1
creating 2-1
editing 3-1
properties F-1
rephasing 3-98
nodes
adding 2-4
automatic validation criteria C-1
changing properties 3-30
copying 3-27
deleting 3-29
moving 3-27
properties F-3
resizing 3-29
selecting in base voltage range 3-22
toggling symbols 3-29
O
opening files 3-15
corridor files 6-21
Hub files 1-39
native files 1-38
raw data files 1-39, A-6
over current relays
properties F-27
P
panning the diagram 2-28
parameter file differences A-31
performing analysis
CAPO 4-43
load flow 4-19
motor starting 4-34
short circuit 4-28
TOPO 4-46
ports 2-39
print options 2-20
print preview
diagram view 2-22
print settings 2-21
printing files
corridor files 6-23
printing the diagram 2-20, 2-23
progress view 1-14
properties
diagram view 1-32
network 2-2
IX-4
nodes 3-30
reliability 2-3
protection and coordination 7-1
coordination study 7-27
coordination view 7-27
device database 7-32
device database interface 7-41
editing cable/conductor damage curves 718
editing fuses 7-11
editing machine protection curves 7-24
editing reclosers 7-21
editing relays 7-12
editing transformer damage curves 7-14
equipment packs 7-1, 7-3
fuse tables 7-32
importing customized database tables 7-53
printing device database 7-52
recloser tables 7-38
relay tables 7-35
protection equipment
properties F-25
R
raw data file
asynchronous machine load B-12
capacitor data section B-14
format B-1
line or cable data B-4
load data section B-10
load type definitions B-10
machine loads B-12
MWh load data section B-13
node declaration section B-3
series capacitor or series reactor data B-6
source data section B-3
switch data B-5
synchronous machine load B-12
system parameters section B-2
tie switch data B-5
title section B-2
transformer data B-6
transformer tap changing data section B-7
transformer type codes B-8
reclosers
edting 7-21
properties F-33
relays
edting 7-12
report database
branch results G-1
capacitor properties G-5
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
S
saving diagram views 2-28
saving files 2-19
corridor files 6-22
image 2-31
raw data A-8
scaling
automatic 3-91
loads 3-87
Confidential
Index
machines 3-89
MWh loads 3-90
scaling/offsetting diagram coordinates 2-27
selecting groups 3-19
selecting islands 3-20
selecting items 3-15
all 3-19
filters 3-24
multiple adjacent 3-17
multiple nonadjacent 3-18
single 3-16
selecting load categories 3-21
series capacitor/reactor
automatic validation criteria C-2
changing properties 3-50
properties F-23
user-specified validation criteria C-4
setting default item properties 1-35
setting diagram view properties 1-32
color coding 1-33
colors 1-33
default 1-34
fonts 1-33
item labels 1-33
resetting 1-34
setting network properties 2-2
root node 2-3
setting program properties 1-27
construction dictionary 1-27, 1-29
coordinate scale factors 1-28, 1-30
displaying hidden diagram items 1-28, 1-30
input file 1-27, 1-29
report file 1-27, 1-29
restoring last saved workspace 1-28, 1-30
static load property sheet display 1-28, 130
tooltips 1-30
transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30
setting reliability properties 2-3
short circuit solutions
lines and cables 4-29
machine modeling 4-30, A-15
sources 4-29
static load modeling 4-30
transformers 4-29
shunt capacitors
automatic validation criteria C-2
shunts
adding 2-5
copying 3-55
deleting 3-55
moving 3-54
IX-5
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
source
angle A-34
automatic validation criteria C-2
changing properties 3-63
grounding impedance 3-65
multiple A-34
properties F-13
user-specified validation criteria C-4
specifying print options 2-20
specifying print settings 2-21
standard fault
changing properties 3-83
properties F-24
static load A-35
changing properties 3-56
grounding impedance 3-57
properties F-9
static load property sheet display 1-28, 1-30
status bar
using 1-16
switches
automatic validation criteria C-1
changing properties 3-38
properties F-22
synchronous machine
automatic validation criteria C-3
changing properties 3-74
grounding impedance 3-78
properties F-16
user-specified validation criteria C-4
T
tabular reports
branch current 5-2
branch power 5-2
branch power losses 5-2
CAPO 5-5
DRA 5-5
fault all current 5-5
input list of network data 5-2
network summary 5-4
node voltage 5-2
power flow summary 5-4
shunt current 5-3
shunt power 5-4
status 5-4
TOPO 5-5
thevenin equivalent impedance 4-30
toolbars 1-18
analysis 1-25
copying a button 1-21
creating 1-21
IX-6
customizing 1-20
deleting a button 1-22
diagram 1-23
file 1-23
hiding 1-21
moving 1-20
report 1-27
resetting 1-22
results 1-26
saving 1-22
tooltip 1-18
zoom 1-26
tooltips 1-30
TOPO result options 4-13
transformer damage
properties F-29
transformer damage curves
edting 7-14
transformer modeling A-1
auto A-13
grounding A-13
impedance A-10
regulating A-12
size A-10
three winding A-10
three-legged core A-11
transformer symbols 1-28, 1-30
transformers
automatic validation criteria C-2
calculating compensating impedance 3-46
changing properties 3-41
compensating impedance 3-46
conversions not supported A-8
grounding impedance 3-43
properties F-5
user-specified validation criteria C-4
tree
selecting 3-23
U
unbalance
current 4-51
voltage 4-48
using PSS/ADEPT
diagram view 1-61-7
equipment list view 1-6, 1-9
exiting 1-5
installing 1-5
main menu 1-17
opening files 3-15
opening native files 1-38
opening PSS/Engines Hub files 1-39
Confidential
PSS/ADEPT-5
Users Manual
Index
V
validation
automatic 4-2
user-initiated 4-4
viewing a group 2-9
viewing a load category 2-12
views
diagram 1-7
docking 2-24
equipment list 1-9
floating 2-25
hiding 1-7, 2-23
progress list 1-14
report preview 1-15, 5-9
showing 1-7
W
workspace
creating 3-86
deleting 3-86
restoring last saved 3-85
retrieving 3-85
saving 3-86
Confidential
IX-7
IX-8
Confidential